2007 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M · control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 17Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 43Airbag System ........................................ 76Restraint System Check ......................... 94

Features and Controls ................................ 97Keys ....................................................... 99Doors and Locks .................................. 104Windows ............................................... 110Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 112Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 115Mirrors .................................................. 138

OnStar® System ................................... 147Storage Areas ...................................... 150Sunroof ................................................ 153

Instrument Panel ....................................... 155Instrument Panel Overview ................... 158Climate Controls ................................... 176Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ... 179Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 196Audio System(s) ................................... 205

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 245Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 246Towing ................................................. 297

2007 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 319Service ................................................. 322Fuel ...................................................... 325Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 330Rear Axle ............................................. 368Four-Wheel Drive .................................. 368Front Axle ............................................ 369Bulb Replacement ................................ 370Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 375Tires ..................................................... 377Appearance Care .................................. 424

Vehicle Identification ............................. 434Electrical System .................................. 434Capacities and Specifications ................ 439

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 441Maintenance Schedule .......................... 442

Customer Assistance Information ............. 463Customer Assistance and Information ... 464Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 481

Index .......................................................... 485

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thename COLORADO are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15866155 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazardis. Then we tell you what to do to help avoidor reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Power Seats ............................................... 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Lumbar ............................................. 11Heated Seats .............................................. 11Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15Seatback Latches ........................................ 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 17Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) .......... 17Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ................ 18

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 25Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 33Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 34

Right Front Passenger Position ................... 34Center Front Passenger Position ................. 35Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 42Safety Belt Extender ................................... 42

Child Restraints ............................................ 43Older Children ............................................. 43Infants and Young Children ......................... 46Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 53Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 56Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 68Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ....................... 71Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 71

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 76Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 79When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 84How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 84What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 85Passenger Sensing System ......................... 86

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 92Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 93Restraint System Check ............................... 94

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 94Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 95

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to make sure the seat is locked into place.

9

Power Seats

If the vehicle has powerseats, the controls usedto operate them arelocated on the outboardside of the seats.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe horizontal control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire horizontal control up or down.

• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 12 for moreinformation.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, there is a knoblocated on the outboardside of the driver’s seat.

Turn the top of the knob toward the front of thevehicle to increase lumbar support. Turn the topof the knob toward the rear of the vehicle todecrease lumbar support.

10

Power Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the control islocated on the outboardside of the seat(s).

Press and hold the front of the control until youhave the desired lumbar support. To decreaselumbar support, press and hold the rear ofthe control.

Heated SeatsIf your vehicle has thisfeature, the controls arelocated on the outboardside of the front seats.

This feature will heat the cushion and back ofthe seats.Press the top of the switch to turn the heat to thehigh setting. Press the bottom of the switch toturn the heat to the low setting. Put the switch inthe center position to turn the heat off.The ignition must be on for the heated seatfeature to work. The seat will heat to the lastsetting if the ignition has been turned off and thenturned back on.The passenger’s safety belt must be fastenedfor the heated seat feature to work on thepassenger’s seat.

11

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

If your seats have manual reclining seatbacks, thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seat(s).

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

12

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have powerreclining seatbacks, usethe vertical power seatcontrol located on theoutboard side ofthe seat.

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the control towardthe front of the vehicle.

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicleis in motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

14

Head RestraintsYour front seats may have adjustable headrestraints. If your vehicle has rear seats, theymay have adjustable head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull up on the headrestraint to raise it.To lower the headrestraint, pressthe button located ontop of the seatbackand push down onthe head restraint.

15

Seatback LatchesYour vehicle may have front seatbacks that foldforward for easy access to the rear seats orthe storage area behind the seats.

To fold the seatbackforward, push the leveron the side of theseat rearward and pullthe seatback forward.

{CAUTION:


To return the seatback to the upright position,push the seatback all the way back until it latches.If the seatback was reclined before being foldedforward, it will return to the reclined position.

16

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)

If your vehicle has anextended cab, there maybe forward folding seatsin the rear area.

To fold the rear seat cushion(s) from the storedposition to the sitting position, pull the front of theseat cushion down completely.

The rear seat storage compartments must beclosed before folding the seat down. SeeRear Storage Area on page 151.

To store the seat, do the following:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

1. Secure the safety belt buckle to the inboardside of the seat with the hook and loopfastener (A), so that it does not move whennot in use.

2. Push the entire seat up until it is flush with thetrim panel.

17

Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)The rear seatback(s) in the crew cab can be foldedforward.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To fold the rear seatback(s) forward, do thefollowing:

1. Disconnect the rear center safety belt latchfrom the mini buckle by inserting the tipof the safety belt tongue into the slot on thebuckle. Let the belt retract.

18

2. Pull the loop,located on theoutboard sideof the seatback,forward untilyou hear a click.

3. Fold the seatback(s) forward.

To return the seatback(s) to the upright position,do the following:1. Lift the seatback(s) and push it into place.

{CAUTION:


2. Make sure the seatback(s) is locked bypushing and pulling on it.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plateto the mini buckle. Make sure the safety beltis not twisted. Push and pull on the latchplate to be sure it is secure.

When the seatback is not in use, it should be keptin the upright, locked position.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things youshould not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 182 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 182.

20

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will bea bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

21

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

22

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

23

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

24

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

25

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 33.

26

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

27

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will notgive nearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

28


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

29


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltis buckled in the wrong place like this. Ina crash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

30


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

31


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

32

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way. Whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate upthe safety belt webbing. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, nearthe guide loop on the side wall.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce the effectiveness of thesafety belt in a crash.

To move it up or down,squeeze the releasebuttons (A) together,or pull them toward you,and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without squeezingthe release buttons to make sure it has lockedinto position.

33

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Positionon page 25.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

34

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a 60/40 split front seat,someone can sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as thelap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

35

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

36

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

37

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

38

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. For outboard seating positions, whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plateup the safety belt webbing. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, near theguide loop on the side wall.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesYour vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfortguides for the rear outside positions.

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfort guide to theshoulder belt.

1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip locatedbetween the interior body and the seatback.

39

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then, placethe guide over the belt and insert the two edgesof the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

40

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store a comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can take themout of the guide. Slide the guide back on itsstorage clip located between the interior body andthe seatback.

41

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 95.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

42

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

44

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

45

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates canbe seriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint systemcan provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system isa portable one, which is purchased bythe vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,an add-on child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. With built-in or add-onchild restraints, the child has to be securedwithin the child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Makesure the child restraint is properlyinstalled in the vehicle using the vehicle’ssafety belt or LATCH system, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure thechild is properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

53

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing child isso great if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless passengerairbag status indicator shows off and the airbag isoff. Here is why:

54

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be transportedin vehicles with a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,whenever possible.




{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition. The restraints will not work properly.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

55

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors orthe safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

56

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

57

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.


j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

ExtendedCab — Rear Seat

58


For crew cab models, there are exposed metallower anchors for each rear outboard seatingposition, located where the seatback meets theback of the seat cushion.

For extended cab models with rear seats, thereare exposed metal lower anchors for eachrear seating position, attached to the back wall,near the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, placeyour hand in a palm-up position and reach upbetween the seat cushion and the seatback.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

Front Seat — Regularand Extended Cabwithout Rear Seats

59

The top tether anchors in a crew cab model arelocated on the back wall behind each rear seatingposition. Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

The top tether anchors in an extended cab modelare located on the center of the back wallbehind a removable cover for the rear seatingpositions. Be sure to use an anchor locatednearest to the seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Crew Cab Extended Cab — Rear Seat

60

For regular and extended cab models without rearseats, there is a top tether anchor locatedbehind a removable cover on the back wall behindthe right front passenger seat. You may have topull the seatback forward to access the anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position of a vehicle that hasrear seats if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be attached. There is no place toattach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 53for additional information.

Regular and Extended Cab without Rear Seats

61

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

62

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

63

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions

recommends that the top tether be attached,attach the top tether to the top tetheranchor (A). Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access thetop tether anchors (A). See Rear SeatOperation (Extended Cab) on page 17or Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)on page 18.

2.2. Route the top tether according to yourchild restraint instructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position youare using has a fixedhead restraint andyou are using asingle tether, routethe tether over thehead restraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise thehead restraint and routethe tether under thehead restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

64

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable head restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether around thehead restraint.

2.3. Attach the top tether to the anchor (A).Make sure that you secure the toptether to the top tether anchor and notto the seatback latch (B).

2.4. Push rearward on the seatback until itlocks into its upright position. Push andpull on the seatback to make sure itis secured properly.

3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

3.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

3.2. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

4. Tighten the top tether.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

65

Extended Cab — Rear Seat

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors (D) for thedesired seating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

1.3. Attach the lower attachments on thechild restraint to the lower anchors (D)in the vehicle. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tetheranchor (C). Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Pull on the finger access tab to removethe cover to access the top tetheranchors (C).

2.2. Route the top tether (A) through theloop (B) at the top of the seatback toattach the top tether to the nearest toptether anchor (C).

66

3. Tighten the lower anchor attachments and thetop tether. The child restraint instructions willshow you how.


Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cabwithout Rear SeatsYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbagand a passenger sensing system. The passengersensing system is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag when an infant ina rear-facing infant seat or a small child in aforward-facing child restraint or booster seat isdetected. See Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 71 andPassenger Sensing System on page 86 forimportant safety information and additionalinformation on installing a child restraint in theright front seat position.

1. See Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position on page 71 for instructionson installing the child restraint using thesafety belts.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructionsrecommends that the top tether be attached,attach and tighten the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access thetop tether anchor. See SeatbackLatches on page 16.

2.2. Pull on the finger access tab to removethe cover to access the top tetheranchor.

2.3. Route the top tether according to yourchild restraint instructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position youare using has a fixedhead restraint andyou are using asingle tether, routethe tether over thehead restraint.

67

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise thehead restraint and routethe tether under thehead restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable head restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether around thehead restraint.

3. Attach and tighten the top tether according toyour child restraint instructions.


Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 56.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

68

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attachthe top tether to the top tether anchor. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.

69

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

7. Tighten the top tether to the anchor. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. Thesafety belt will move freely again and be ready towork for an adult or larger child passenger.For outboard seating positions, when the safetybelt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safetybelt webbing. The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near the upper anchoron the side wall.

70

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killedby the right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in this position.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag. A rear seat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 53.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 86 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 184for more information on this including importantsafety information.

71

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing childis so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, andno one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.



We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


If your vehicle does not have a rear seat thatwill accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

72

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend



that rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 56.

If your vehicle has rear seats, there is no toptether anchor at the right front seating position.Do not secure a child seat in this position ifa national or local law requires that the top tetherbe anchored or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 56 if the childrestraint has a top tether.

73

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 86. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to ON or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 184.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

74

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. If your vehicle does not have rear seats and ifyour child restraint has a top tether, attach thetop tether to the top tether anchor. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.

7. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.

8. Tighten the top tether to the anchor. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 56.

75


10. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to ON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle if one is available and check withyour dealer.

To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. Thesafety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger.When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the upper anchor on the side wall.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driverand a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare available for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver and for the rightfront passenger and the passenger seateddirectly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the ceiling near theside windows.

76

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.



Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

77

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 43 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 46.

78

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 183 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

79

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is located in the ceilingabove the side windows.

80

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it islocated in the ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. If your vehiclehas side impact airbags, never secureanything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating side impact airbagwill be blocked. The path of an inflatingairbag must be kept clear.

81

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderate frontalimpacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat doesn’t move or deform, the threshold levelfor the reduced deployment is about 8 to 16 mph(12.9 to 25.7 km/h), and the threshold level fora full deployment is about 19 to 24 mph(30.6 to 38.6 km/h) if the other sensors do notover-ride this. The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that itcan be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the

airbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

82

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

If your vehicle has side impact airbags, it haselectronic side sensors. The side impact airbagsare intended to inflate in moderate to severeside crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system’s designed“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design. Side impact airbags arenot intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontalimpacts, rollovers or rear impacts. Both sideimpact airbags will deploy when either side of thevehicle is struck.

Your vehicle has seat position sensors whichenable the sensing system to monitor the positionof the driver’s seat and the right front passenger’sseat. Seat position sensors provide informationthat is used to determine if the airbags shoulddeploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown in frontal or near-frontal impacts. Forside impact airbags, inflation is determined by thelocation and severity of the impact.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See Off-Road Driving on page 260 for more tipson off-road driving.

83

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there are alsoairbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

84

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutes afterthe vehicle comes to rest. Some components of theairbag module — the steering wheel hub for thedriver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s airbag or the ceiling of yourvehicle near the side windows — may be hot for ashort time. The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, but not too hot totouch. There may be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbaginflation does not prevent the driver from seeing outof the front windshield or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it prevent people from leavingthe vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dustin the air. This dust could cause breathingproblems for people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone in the vehicle should getout as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave breathing problems but cannot getout of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathing problemsfollowing an airbag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors (if your vehicle has powerdoor locks), turn the interior lamps on, flash thehazard warning flashers, and turn off the radiowhen the airbag inflates. You can lock thedoors again by using the door lock. The interiorlamps and hazard warning flashers will deactivateafter approximately 15 minutes. You can usethe radio controls to adjust the radio.

85

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur fromthe right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another crash. A newsystem will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collectionand Event Data Recorders on page 476.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can meanthat your airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to ON or START. The words ONand OFF or the symbol for on and off, willbe visible during the system check.

When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 184.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

United States Canada

86

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s frontalairbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. We recommend that child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding ina forward-facing child seat and an older childriding in a booster seat.There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing childis so great if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.



This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be veryclose to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


87

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the system



detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


88

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger’s frontal airbag has beenturned off by the passenger sensing system, theoff indicator on the instrument panel will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 71.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle ifone is available and check with your dealer.

89

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the rightfront passenger’s seat, but the off indicator islit, it could be because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens, turn thevehicle off and ask the person to place theseatback in the fully upright position, then situpright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remainin this position for about two minutes. Thiswill allow the system to detect that person andthen enable the passenger’s airbag.

90

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 183 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 93 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

91

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 482.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

92

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 464.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If youhave questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two ofthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 464.

93

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 427for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe side impact airbag covering (if equipped)on the ceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s airbag, or sideimpact airbag module and ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

94

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new beltsor LATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 183.

95

✍ NOTES

96

Keys .............................................................. 99Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 101Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................. 102Doors and Locks ........................................ 104

Door Locks ................................................ 104Power Door Locks ..................................... 105Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 106Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) ....... 106Lockout Protection ..................................... 107Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ...................... 107Tailgate ..................................................... 108

Windows ...................................................... 110Manual Windows ....................................... 110Power Windows ........................................ 111Sliding Rear Window ................................. 112Sun Visors ................................................ 112

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 112Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 113Passlock® .................................................. 114

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 115New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 115Ignition Positions ....................................... 116Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 117Starting the Engine .................................... 118Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 119Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 120Manual Transmission Operation ................. 124Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 126Parking Brake ........................................... 130Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 132Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 134Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transmission) ........................... 134Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 135Engine Exhaust ......................................... 136Running the Engine While Parked ............. 137

Section 2 Features and Controls

97

Mirrors ......................................................... 138Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 138Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 138Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display .............................. 139

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with Compass andTemperature Display .............................. 142

Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 145Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 145Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 146

OnStar® System .......................................... 147Storage Areas ............................................. 150

Glove Box ................................................. 150Cupholder(s) .............................................. 150Front Armrest Storage Area ....................... 151Assist Handles .......................................... 151Rear Storage Area .................................... 151

Sunroof ....................................................... 153

Section 2 Features and Controls

98

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

99

There is a double-sidedkey that can be used forthe ignition, all doorlocks, and the tailgate.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerprovides the owner with a pair of identical keysand a key code number.

The key code number tells your dealer or aqualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keepthis number in a safe place. If you lose yourkeys, you will be able to have new ones madeeasily using this number. Your dealer should alsohave this number.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle callthe GM Roadside Assistance Center. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 470.

100

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 102.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

101

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationIf your vehicle has this feature you can lock andunlock your doors and disarm or arm yourtheft-deterrent system from about 3 feet (1 m) upto 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keylessentry transmitter. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 113 for additional information.

UNLOCK: Press thisbutton to unlock thedriver’s door and turn onthe interior lamps.The parking lamps mayalso flash, and thehorn may chirp, whenthis button is pressed.

Press the unlock button again withinthree seconds and all of the doors will unlock.

LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors. Theparking lamps may also flash and the horn maychirp when this button is pressed.

If a door is open or ajar when the lock button ispressed, the horn will chirp several times to let youknow the doors did not lock and the contenttheft-deterrent system is not armed. Pressing thelock button again while the horn is chirping or withinthree seconds after the horn stops sounding, thedoors will lock but the content theft-deterrentsystem will not arm until the opened door is closed.

You can program different feedback modesthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC).To program the feedback modes, see “RemoteKeyless Entry Feedback” under DIC Controls andDisplays on page 196.

L (Panic): Press this button to make the hornsound and the headlamps and taillamps flashfor up to 30 seconds. To turn them off again, doone of these three things: wait for 30 seconds;press the panic button again; or start the vehicle.

102

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through your dealer.Remember to bring any remaining transmitters withyou when you go to your dealer. When the dealermatches the replacement transmitter to yourvehicle, any remaining transmitters must also bematched. Once your dealer has coded the newtransmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock yourvehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last abouttwo years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery, do the following:

1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slotbetween the covers of the transmitter housing.Gently pry the transmitter apart.

2. Remove and replace the battery with athree-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.4. Check the operation of the transmitter.

103

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlockyour vehicle.

To lock or unlock the door from the outside, usethe key in the driver’s or front passenger’s door orpress the lock or unlock button on the remotekeyless entry (RKE) transmitter.

104

To lock a door from the inside, push themanual lever on the door forward. To unlocka door from the inside, push the lever on thedoor rearward.

You will see a colored area on the lever when thedoor is unlocked.

Power Door Locks

If your vehicle haspower door locks, theswitches are located onthe driver’s and thefront passenger’sarmrests.

Press L (lock) to lock all the doors at once.To unlock all the doors, press U (unlock).

On crew cab models, use the manual door locklever on each rear door to lock or unlock the doorsfrom the rear seating areas.

Driver’s Switch Shown,Front Passenger’s

Switch Similar

105

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksIf your vehicle has power door locks and theremote keyless entry system, it has an automaticlock/unlock feature.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it isprogrammed from the factory to lock all doorsautomatically when the shift lever is moved out ofPARK (P). All the doors will unlock when theshift lever is moved back into PARK (P).

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, itis programmed from the factory to lock all thedoors when the vehicle speed is greater than15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will unlock whenthe key is removed from the ignition.

To change the automatic door lock and unlocksettings, see “Automatic Door Locks” underDIC Controls and Displays on page 196.

Rear Door Security Locks(Crew Cab)If your vehicle is a crew cab model, it may haverear door security locks. With this feature, you canlock the rear doors so they cannot be openedfrom the inside.

The rear door securitylock is located on theinside edge of each reardoor below thesecurity lock label.

106

To engage the security locks, do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock to thehorizontal position.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.

If you want to open a rear door when the securitylock is on, unlock the door and open the doorfrom the outside.

To disengage the security locks, do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock to thevertical position.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.

Lockout ProtectionIf you have power door locks, this feature protectsyou from locking your key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a door is open.

If the power door lock switch is pressed when adoor is open and the key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.

Rear Doors (Extended Cab)To open a rear door, open the front door. Then,use the handle located on the front edge ofthe rear door panel to open it. You must close therear door before closing the front door.

107

Tailgate

You can open the tailgate by pulling up on theoutside handle while pulling the tailgate down.

When you put the tailgate back up, be sureit latches securely.

You can lock the tailgate using your ignitionkey. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock thetailgate. Turn the key clockwise to unlockthe tailgate.

Removing the TailgateFollow these steps if you want to remove thetailgate:

1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly onthe entire tailgate assembly.

2. Remove theretaining cablesfrom both sides ofthe tailgate bypulling the clipsaway from the boltheads whilepushing the cablebracket forward.

When the larger part of the hole on the bracket isover the bolt, slide the bracket off of the bolt.

3. With the tailgate partially down, lift up on thepassenger’s side and pull the tailgate towardyou, then move the tailgate to the right torelease the driver’s side. You can then removethe entire tailgate assembly.

Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate.Make sure it is secure.

108

To partially lower the tailgate do the following:

1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly onthe entire tailgate assembly.

2. Remove theretaining cable fromthe passengerside of the tailgateby pulling theclip away from thebolt head whilepushing the cablebracket forward.

When the larger part of the hole on thebracket is over the bolt, slide the bracket off ofthe bolt.

3. Slide the lower end fitting onto the top bolt.The tailgate will now stay in the partiallyopened position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the driver side.

If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracketcannot be in the partially opened position andmust be anchored on the bottom bolt, using the topposition on the bracket.

Tailgate Partially Down

109

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsOn a vehicle with manual windows, use thehandle on each door to open and close eachwindow.

110

Power Windows

The power windowswitches for all windowsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.In addition, eachpassenger’s door has itsown switch.

The power windows will work when the ignition isin ACC (Accessory) or ON or while RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 117.

Pull the front of the switch up to raise the window.Press the front of the switch down to lower thewindow.

Do not hold all four power window switches downfor several seconds after the windows havebeen completely lowered or raised, because thevehicle may blow a fuse.

Express-Down WindowsThe driver’s window has an express-down featurethat allows the window to be lowered fullywithout continuously holding the switch. Press thefront of the switch past the first position toactivate the express-down mode. Theexpress-down mode can be canceled at any timeby pulling up on the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): If you have a crew cabvehicle with power windows, you will also have awindow lockout button located forward of thewindow switches. This feature disables thepassenger’s window switches when the windowlockout button is pressed. To turn the lockoutfeature on or off, press the window lockout button.A red band on the side of the button can beseen when the windows are not locked out.

Crew Cab SwitchesShown

111

Sliding Rear Window

If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latchin the center of the window and slide the glassto open it.

When you close the window, be sure the latch isengaged.

Sun VisorsTo block glare, pull the sun visor down. It can alsobe detached from the center mount and movedto the side to block glare from that direction.

Visor Vanity MirrorThe passenger’s side sun visor may have amirror. Pull down the visor to access the mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

112

Content Theft-Deterrent

If your vehicle has theremote keyless entrysystem, the vehicle hasa content theft-deterrentalarm system.

To activate the content theft-deterrent system, dothe following:

1. Close all the doors.

2. Lock the doors with the remote keyless entrytransmitter. The security light, located on theinstrument panel cluster, will flash.

If the lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter is pressed, but a door is open, the hornwill chirp six times. Press the lock button again,within three seconds, and the doors will lock. Closethe open door and the system will be activated.

If a locked door is not opened using the remotekeyless entry transmitter, or by OnStar®, thepre-alarm will go off. If the engine is not started orunlock not pressed within 10 seconds, the front

turn signal lamps will flash for two minutes, andthe horn will sound for two minutes, then will turnoff to save the battery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system will notactivate if you lock the doors with a key, themanual door lock, or power door lock switch. Thesystem can only be activated using the remotekeyless entry transmitter, or by OnStar®. SeeOnStar® System on page 147 for additionalinformation. You should also remember that youcan start your vehicle with the correct ignition key ifthe alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle should be locked with thedoor key after the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with the remote keylessentry transmitter. Unlocking a door any otherway will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turnoff the alarm by pressing unlock on the remotekeyless entry transmitter. The alarm will not stop ifyou try to unlock a door any other way.

113

Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system

by locking the doors with the remote keylessentry transmitter.

2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock andopen the door. This should set off the alarm.

3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter orstart the engine.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but thelights flash, check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, seeFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 435.If the alarm does not sound or the front turn signallamps do not flash, see your dealer for service.

Passlock®

Your vehicle has the Passlock® theft-deterrentsystem.

Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder isturned with a valid key. If an incorrect key is used orthe ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuelsystem is disabled and the vehicle will not start.

During normal operation, the security light will turnoff approximately five seconds after the engineis started. See Security Light on page 194.If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,wait about 10 minutes until the light stopsflashing before trying to restart the engine.Remember to release the key from START assoon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start after three tries, thevehicle needs service.

If the engine is running and the security light comeson, you will be able to restart the engine if you turnthe engine off. However, your Passlock® system isnot working properly and must be serviced by yourdealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock®

at this time. See your dealer for service.

In an emergency, call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 470.

114

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)

or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 305 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

115

Ignition Positions

With the key in theignition switch, you canturn to four differentpositions.

LOCK (A): This position locks the ignition. It alsolocks the transmission on automatic transmissionvehicles. It will locks the steering wheel onmanual transmission vehicles when the key isremoved. It is a theft-deterrent feature. Youwill only be able to remove your key when theignition is turned to LOCK.

If you have an automatic transmission, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless theshift lever is in PARK (P).

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

ACC (ACCESSORY) (B): This is the position inwhich you can operate your electrical accessoriesor items plugged into the accessory poweroutlets. On automatic transmission vehicles, thisposition unlocks the ignition. On manualtransmission vehicles, it unlocks the ignition andsteering wheel. Use this position if your vehiclemust be pushed or towed.

116

ON (C): This is the position that the switchreturns to after you start your engine and releasethe switch. The switch stays in ON when theengine is running. But even when the engine isnot running, you can use ON to operate theelectrical accessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warning and indicatorlights. The transmission is also unlocked inthis position on automatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ACC or ON position with the engine off.You may not be able to start your vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for an extended periodof time.

START (D): This is the position that starts theengine. When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch returns to ON for driving.

When the engine is not running, ACC and ONallows you to operate the electrical accessories,such as the radio or items plugged into theaccessory power outlets.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor when the ignition is in ACC or LOCK andthe key is in the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)which allows certain features of your vehicle tocontinue working for up to 20 minutes afterthe ignition key is turned to LOCK.

The radio, wipers, and power windows work whenthe ignition key is in ON or ACC. Once the keyis turned from ON to LOCK, these featurescontinue to work for up to 20 minutes or until adoor is opened.

117

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Automatic TransmissionMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in the NEUTRAL positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutchpedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as the engine gets warm. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

118

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature.

In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater can help. You will get easierstarting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up. Usually, the coolant heater shouldbe plugged in a minimum of four hours prior tostarting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F(0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostatin the plug end of the cord. This will preventoperation of the engine coolant heater when thetemperature is at or above 0F (−18C) as noted onthe cord.

119

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical

cord. The cord is located in the enginecompartment behind the underhood fuse blockon the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your automatic transmission has a shift lever onthe steering column.It features an electronic shift position indicatorwithin the instrument cluster. This display must bepowered anytime the shift lever is capable of beingmoved out of PARK (P). This means that if your keyis turned off, but not in LOCK, there will be a smallcurrent drain on your battery which could dischargeyour battery over a period of time.

120

If you need to leave your key in the ignition but notin LOCK for an extended period, it is recommendedthat you disconnect the battery cable from thebattery to prevent discharging your battery.

There are several different positions for yourshift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can



move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransmission) on page 132. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 305.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes beforeyou can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition keyis in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing theshift lever all the way into PARK (P) as youmaintain brake application. Then move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shifting Out ofPark (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 134.

121

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 288.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

122

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.If provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 259 Loss of Control.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)when driving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. The repair will not be covered byyour warranty. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

123

Manual Transmission Operation

This is your shiftpattern.

Here is how to operate your manual transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on theclutch. Then press the clutch pedal back down andshift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shiftinto THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5)the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly letup on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.After the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shiftlever return to NEUTRAL and release the clutchpedal. Then press the clutch again and shift intoREVERSE (R). Do not attempt to shift into the fifthgear position prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).Your transmission has a lock out feature whichprevents a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.

124

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.

Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,for parking your vehicle.

Up-Shift Light

This light will show youwhen to shift to the nexthigher gear for bestfuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the nexthigher gear if weather, road and traffic conditionspermit. For the best fuel economy, accelerateslowly and shift when the light comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normal for the light togo on and off if you quickly change the position ofthe accelerator. Ignore the shift light when youdownshift.

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and has amanual transmission, disregard the shift light whenthe transfer case is in four-wheel low.

For more information, see Up-Shift Light (ManualTransmission) on page 187.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

125

Four-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can sendyour engine’s driving power to all four wheelsfor extra traction. To get the best performance outof four-wheel drive, you must be familiar withits operation. Read the part that follows beforeusing four-wheel drive. You should usetwo-wheel-drive high for most normal drivingconditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive for an extended period of timecan cause premature wear on your vehicle’spowertrain. Do not drive on clean, drypavement in four-wheel drive for extendedperiods of time.

Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand the compact spare tire is installed on yourvehicle, do not drive in four-wheel driveuntil you can have your flat tire repaired and/orreplaced. You could damage your vehicle,and the repair costs would not be covered byyour warranty. Never use four-wheel drivewhen the compact spare tire is installedon your vehicle.

The transfer case buttons are located to the rightof the steering wheel on the instrument panel.

Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2 m 4 m 4 n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 297 orTowing Your Vehicle on page 297 for furtherinformation.

126

Use these buttons to shift into and out offour-wheel drive. You can choose from thefollowing:

2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is fordriving in most street and highway situations. Yourfront axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRALcan cause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P), or if youhave a manual transmission, even if youare in gear. You or someone else could beseriously injured. Be sure to set theparking brake before placing the transfercase in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake onpage 130.

N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting engagesyour front axle to help drive your vehicle. Usefour-wheel high when you need extra traction, suchas on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-roadsituations.

4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting alsoengages your front axle to give you extra traction.It sends the maximum power to all four wheels.You might choose four-wheel low if you weredriving off-road in sand, mud, or deep snow andwhile climbing or descending steep hills.

Indicator lights in the buttons show you whichsetting you are in. The indicator lights will come onbriefly when you turn on the ignition and one willstay on the selected setting. If the lights donot come on, you should take your vehicle in forservice. An indicator light will flash while shifting.It will stay on when the shift is completed.

If for some reason the transfer case does not shift,it will return to the last chosen setting.

127

Shifting from Two-Wheel High toFour-Wheel HighPress and release the Four-Wheel High button.This can be done at any speed, and the front axlewill lock automatically.

Shifting from Four-Wheel High toTwo-Wheel HighPress and release the Two-Wheel High button.This can be done at any speed, and the front axlewill unlock automatically.

It is normal to hear and feel your vehicle’s transfercase shift into Four-Wheel High. If you shift withthe vehicle stopped, the indicator light maystill flash slowly. It may be necessary to shift thetransmission momentarily into REVERSE (R)and DRIVE (D), for an automatic transmission, orREVERSE (R) and FIRST (1) for a manualtransmission to have the light stop flashing.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High orFour-Wheel High to Four-Wheel LowTo shift from Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Highto Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N) for an automatictransmission or the clutch pedal pressed fora manual transmission. The preferred method forshifting into Four-Wheel Low is to have yourvehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).

Press and release the Four-Wheel Low button. Youmust wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator light tostop flashing and stay on before shifting thetransmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed when yourvehicle is in gear and/or moving faster than 3 mph(5 km/h), the four-wheel low indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds and not complete the shift.

128

Shifting from Four-Wheel Low toTwo-Wheel High or Four-Wheel HighTo shift from Four-Wheel Low to Two-Wheel Highor Four-Wheel High, your vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N) for an automatictransmission or the clutch pedal engaged for amanual transmission. The preferred method forshifting out of four-wheel low is to have your vehiclemoving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).

Press and release the Four-Wheel High orTwo-Wheel High button. You must wait for theFour-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High indicator lightto stop flashing and stay on before shifting thetransmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High buttonis pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/ormoving faster than 3 mph (5km/h), the Four-WheelHigh or Two Wheel High indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds but not complete the shift.

Shifting to NEUTRALUse NEUTRAL when you plan to tow your vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 297for towing instructions. To shift the transfer caseinto NEUTRAL do the following:1. Set the parking brake.2. Start the vehicle.3. Press the regular brake pedal and shift the

transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or press inthe clutch for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.5. Press and hold the Two-Wheel High and

Four-Wheel Low buttons at the same timefor 10 seconds. The NEUTRAL (N) lightwill come on when the transfer case shift toNEUTRAL (N) is complete.

6. Press and hold the regular brake pedal andshift the transmission to REVERSE (R) forone second, then shift the transmissionto DRIVE (D) for one second, or FIRST (1) forvehicles with manual transmissions, and letout the clutch to insure the transfer case is inNEUTRAL. If the vehicle is not in NEUTRAL,repeat this procedure starting at Step 3.

129

7. Turn the engine off by turning the key toACC (Accessory).

8. Place the transmission shift lever inPARK (P), or FIRST (1) for vehicles that havea manual transmission.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

Shifting Out of NEUTRALAfter towing your vehicle, you will have to shift outof NEUTRAL in order to drive. To shift out ofNEUTRAL, do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmissionin PARK (P). Use FIRST (1) for vehicles witha manual transmission.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N), orpress the clutch pedal for vehicles with amanual transmission.

4. Press the button for the desired transfer caseshift position (Two-Wheel High, Four-WheelHigh, or Four-Wheel Low).

5. After the transfer case has shifted out ofNEUTRAL, the indicator light will go out.

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Shift the transmission to the desired position.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedalis located to the left ofthe regular brake pedal,near the driver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot. Push theparking brake pedal down to its fully-appliedposition with your left foot.

130

A chime will activate and the brake warning light,located on the instrument panel, will flashwhen the parking brake is applied and the vehicleis moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at leastthree seconds. The chime will deactivate and thelight will turn off when the parking brake is setand the vehicle is moving below 3 mph (5 km/h).See Brake System Warning Light on page 187.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down. Pull the bottom edge ofthe lever, located above the parking brake pedal,with the parking brake symbol, directly rearwardto release the parking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake isreleased, the brake system warning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 305.

131

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 305.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

{CAUTION:

If you have four-wheel drive, your vehiclewill be free to roll — even if your shiftlever is in PARK (P) — if your transfercase is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure thetransfer case is in a drive gear, two-wheelhigh (2H) or four-wheel high (4H) orfour-wheel low (4L) — not in NEUTRAL.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pullingthe lever toward you and moving it up as faras it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the key, yourvehicle is in PARK (P).

132

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that the shift leverwas not fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 132.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

133

Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system which locks the shift leverin PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCKposition. In addition, you have to fully apply theregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in ON. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 120.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever by pushing the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then, move the shift lever intothe gear you want.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to ACC. There is no shiftinterlock in this key position.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the endof Step 4.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gearyou want.

5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transmission)Your vehicle has a manual transmission. Beforeyou get out of your vehicle, move the shiftlever into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift lever has beenplaced into REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedalpressed in, turn the ignition key to LOCK, removethe key and release the clutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle ispulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 305.

134

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

135

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

136

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 136.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 284.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transmission shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to. Ifyou have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmissionshift lever to PARK (P), or the manualtransmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.

137

{CAUTION:

Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfercase in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle toroll, even if your automatic transmissionshift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure thetransfer case is in a drive gear — not inNEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 132.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 305.

MirrorsManual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjustthe mirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up ordown and side to side. The control at the bottom ofthe mirror is the day/night feature that allowsadjustment to the mirror so that the glare ofheadlamps from behind is reduced. Push thecontrol for daytime use; pull it for night use.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

Mirror OperationYour vehicle may have a manual rearview mirrorwith the OnStar® System. You can adjust the mirrorfor day or night driving. Press the tab forward forday driving. Pull the tab back for night driving.There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 147 formore information about the services OnStar®

provides.

138

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on themirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®, Compass andTemperature DisplayYour vehicle may have this feature. When on, theautomatic dimming mirror dims to the proper levelto minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.

The mirror has a dual display in the upper rightcorner of the mirror face that shows the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at thebottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System onpage 147 for more information about the servicesOnStar® provides.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the farleft, briefly to turn the compass/temperaturedisplay on or off.

If the display reads CAL, the compass needs tobe calibrated. For more information, see “CompassCalibration” following.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, dothe following:

1. Press and hold the on/off button forapproximately four seconds until either aflashing F or C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew unit will be locked in and thecompass/temperature display will return.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, see yourdealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay inupdating the temperature is normal.

139

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the green indicator light, located tothe left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not,press and hold the on/off button forapproximately six seconds until the green lightcomes on, indicating that the mirror is inautomatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button forapproximately six seconds, until the greenindicator light turns off.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading, N forNorth, for example, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push the on/off button for approximately12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

140

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is outside of zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustfor compass variance. Compass variance is thedifference between earth’s magnetic north andtrue geographic north. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, the compass could givefalse readings.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appears in the display. Thecompass is now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in thedisplay. Release the button. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew zone number will be locked in andthe compass/temperature display will return.

141

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass and TemperatureDisplayYour vehicle may have this mirror. When on,an automatic dimming mirror will dim to the properlevel to minimize glare from lights behind youafter dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror with the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the displayon or off.

Temperature DisplayThe temperature can be displayed by pressing thecompass/temperature button. Pressing thecompass/temperature button once briefly, willtoggle the display reading on and off. To alternatethe temperature reading between Fahrenheit andCelsius, press and hold the compass/ temperaturebutton for approximately three seconds until thedisplay blinks F and C. After approximatelyfive seconds of inactivity, the display will stopblinking and display the last selection made.

If an abnormal reading is displayed, seeyour dealer.

142

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationO: Press this button to turn the automaticdimming feature on or off. The indicator light tothe left of the button will turn on to indicate whenthe feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off,it will remain off until it is turned back on, or untilthe vehicle is restarted.

Compass OperationPress the compass/temperature button oncebriefly to turn the display on or off.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.• After approximately five seconds, the display

does not show a compass heading, N forNorth, for example, there may be a strong

magnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push in the compass/temperature button forapproximately nine seconds or until CAL isdisplayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

143

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if the vehicleis outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip, it willbe necessary to adjust for compass variance.Compass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance, yourcompass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the compass/temperaturebutton for six seconds until a zone numberappears in the display.

3. Press the compass/temperature button on thebottom of the mirror until the new zonenumber appears in the display. After you stoppressing the button, the display will show acompass direction within a few seconds.

144

Cleaning the MirrorUse a paper towel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror as that may cause the liquidcleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Manual MirrorsIf the vehicle has manual outside mirrors, adjustthem by hand so that the side of the vehicle can beseen while you are sitting in a comfortabledriving position.

The mirrors can be folded inward to preventdamage when going through an automatic carwash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle.To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Return both mirrors to the unfoldedposition before driving.

Outside Power Mirrors

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the controls arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:

1. Move the selector switch to the L (left)or R (right) to choose the driver’s orpassenger’s mirror.

2. Use the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to move the mirror in the directionyou want the mirror to go.

3. Return the selector switch to the centerposition once the mirrors are adjusted.

145

If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, themirror has reached the end of its travel and cango no farther in that direction. To stop thesound, reverse the mirror direction using thecontrol pad.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash. To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors tothe unfolded position before driving.

Outside Convex MirrorYour passenger’s outside rearview mirror isconvex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved soyou can see more from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

146

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms and

Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond the firstyear, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections®

Plan. For more information, press the OnStar®

button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar®

services (such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

147

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

148

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interact with OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS location

and, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle isin a place where OnStar® has an agreement with awireless service provider for service in that area.OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are ina place where the wireless service providerOnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,network capacity and reception when the service isneeded, and technology that is compatible with theOnStar® service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

149

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, pull on the lever.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle may have two cupholders located onthe lower part of the front doors as well as twocupholders located at the front end of the console.Vehicles with bench seats may have cupholdersattached to the front of the center seat.

If your vehicle is an extended cab or crew cabmodel, your vehicle also has two rear cupholders.On crew cab models, the cupholders are locatedat the front end of the rear center seat cushion.On extended cab models, the rear seat cupholdersare located on top of the rear center console.

If you have an ashtray, it will use one of thecupholders.

150

Front Armrest Storage AreaFor vehicles with bench seats, you may have acenter armrest storage area. Lift up on the uppertab located at the front of the armrest to releasethe latch. Lift the lid to open the storage area.

For vehicles with bucket seats or uplevel packages,your vehicle may have a two-tiered center armreststorage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at thefront of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lidto the top storage area. A second tab is locatedbelow the top one and allows you to access thebottom storage area. Lift up on the lower tab torelease the latch. Then, raise the lid of the lowerstorage area. The upper storage area will lift up withthe lid of the lower storage area.

To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s) untilyou feel the latch close.

Assist HandlesYour vehicle may have assist handles to be usedwhen getting out of your vehicle. If your vehicle hasassist handles, they are located above the doors.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags, there are assist handles located above boththe driver’s and front passenger’s doors.

Rear Storage AreaIf your vehicle is an extended cab model, it mighthave storage compartments under the rear seats.

151

To access the storage compartments, lift thecushion on the bottom of the rear seats. Thisexposes the storage boxes under the seat.

To open a storage box, unhook the bottom and liftthe two latches on each side of the storage box.

152

Lift the lid from the center area to access thestorage box.

SunroofYour vehicle may have a sunroof.

The sunroof controlbuttons are located onthe headliner.

Q (Open/Vent): Press and hold this button tovent, and open the sunroof. Release the buttonwhen the desired position is reached.

R (Close): Press and hold this button to closethe sunroof. Release the button when the desiredposition is reached.

The sunshade must be opened manually.

153

✍ NOTES

154

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 158Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 160Other Warning Devices ............................. 160Horn .......................................................... 160Tilt Wheel .................................................. 161Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 161Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 162Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 163Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 163Windshield Wipers ..................................... 163Windshield Washer .................................... 164Cruise Control ........................................... 164Exterior Lamps .......................................... 168Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 169Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 170Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 170Fog Lamps ................................................ 171Exterior Cargo Lamps ................................ 172Interior Lamps ........................................... 172Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 172Dome Lamp .............................................. 173Dome Lamp Override ................................ 173Exit Lighting .............................................. 173Electric Power Management ...................... 173

Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 174Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 174Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 175

Climate Controls ......................................... 176Climate Control System ............................. 176Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 178

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 179Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 180Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 181Trip Odometer ........................................... 181Tachometer ............................................... 181Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 182Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 182Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 183Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 184Battery Warning Light ................................ 186Up-Shift Light (Manual Transmission) ........ 187Brake System Warning Light ..................... 187Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 188Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 189Tire Pressure Light .................................... 189Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 190Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 193

Section 3 Instrument Panel

155

Security Light ............................................ 194Cruise Control Light .................................. 194Highbeam On Light ................................... 194Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ........................................ 195Fuel Gage ................................................. 195

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 196DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 196DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 200

Audio System(s) ......................................... 205Setting the Time for Radios without

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................... 206Setting the Time for Radios with

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................... 207

AM-FM Radio ............................................ 207Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 210Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 221Using an MP3 ........................................... 234XM Radio Messages ................................. 240Theft-Deterrent Feature

(Non-RDS Radios) ................................. 242Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) ....... 242Radio Reception ........................................ 242Care of Your CDs ..................................... 243Care of the CD Player .............................. 243Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 244XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 244Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 244

Section 3 Instrument Panel

156

✍ NOTES

157

Instrument Panel Overview

Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar

158

The main components of your vehicle’s instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 178.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 161.C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 180.D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 160.E. Passenger Side Airbag. See Airbag System on

page 76.F. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on

page 168. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). SeeFog Lamps on page 171. Exterior CargoLamps. See Exterior Cargo Lamps onpage 172.

G. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake onpage 130.

H. Horn. See Horn on page 160.I. Traction Control Button or Four-Wheel Drive

Buttons. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 253 and Four-Wheel Drive on page 126.

J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 205.

K. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s)and Cigarette Lighter on page 175.

L. Climate Control System. See Climate ControlSystem on page 176.

M. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 174.

N. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 184.

O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 150.

159

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn the policeand others that you have a problem. The front andrear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon the instrumentpanel, between thetwo air vents inthe center.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbol on thesteering wheel pad.

160

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. The tilt steering wheel can beraised to the highest level to allow more room forthe driver to enter and exit the vehicle.

The tilt lever is located on the left side of thesteering column, under the turn signal lever.

To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt levertoward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level,then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 161.• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 163.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 163.• NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers

on page 163.• LWindshield Washer. See Windshield

Washer on page 164.• J Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on

page 164.

161

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willautomatically return to the off position.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until thechange is completed. The lever will return byitself when released.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash more quickly than normal, a signalbulb may be burned out and other drivers will notsee your vehicle’s turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whensignaling a turn, check for a burned-out bulb or ablown fuse. For bulb replacement, see Taillamps,Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lampson page 373. For a blown fuse or circuit breaker,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 435.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf a turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of amile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash ofthe turn signal and the message TURN SIGNALwill also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime andmessage off, move the turn signal lever to theoff position.

See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 200 for more information.

162

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):To change the headlamps from low to highbeam, push the lever toward the instrument panel.To return to low-beam headlamps, pull themultifunction lever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this indicator lighton the instrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use the high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass. It works even if the headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,then release it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position oron low beam, your high-beam headlamps willturn on. They will stay on as long as you hold thelever toward you. The high-beam indicator onthe instrument panel cluster will come on. Releasethe lever to return to normal operation.

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

The windshield wipers work in all ignition positions,except off. This includes the Retained AccessPower mode. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 117.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the bandto mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then letgo. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you wantmore wipes, hold the band on mist longer.

N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for along or short delay between wipes. This canbe very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the bandto choose the delay time. The closer to the topof the lever, the shorter the delay.

163

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid position past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band to the second solid position past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they’re frozen to thewindshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.If your blades do become worn or damaged,get new blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

QL (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the topof the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid onthe windshield, push the paddle. The wipers willclear the window and then either stop or return toyour preset speed.

Cruise Control

The cruise controlset button is locatedat the end of themultifunction lever.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe system off.

R (On): Move the lever to this position to turn thesystem on.

164

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to thisposition to make the vehicle accelerate or resumeto a previously set speed.

rT (Set): Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, the vehicle can maintain aspeed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control will not work if the parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

If the brakes are applied, the cruise control willshut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.



Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and it begins to limit wheel spinwhile the cruise control is on, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 253. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you can turncruise control back on.

165

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control lever to the on position.2. Get up to the speed you want.3. Press the set button at the end of the lever

and release it.4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The cruise symbol onthe instrument panel willbe lit when the cruisecontrol is engaged.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control to a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This turns offthe cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

The vehicle will go right back up to your chosenspeed and stay there.

If you hold the lever at resume/accelerate thevehicle will keep going faster until you release thelever or apply the brake. Do not hold the leverat resume/accelerate if you do not want the vehicleto go faster.

166

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed. If the accelerator pedal isheld longer than 60 seconds, cruise controlwill turn off.

• Move the cruise lever from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you getup to the speed desired, and then releasethe lever. To increase your speed in very smallamounts, move the lever briefly toresume/accelerate.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press and hold the set button until you reach

the lower speed desired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the set button.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might want to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

167

Ending Cruise ControlTo turn off the cruise control, do one of thefollowing:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Move the cruise control lever to off.

• Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have amanual transmission.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

Exterior Lamps

The control on the driver’s side of the instrumentpanel operates the exterior lamps.

168

O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located tothe right of this symbol, to choose one of thefour exterior lamp positions.

9 (Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn offall exterior lamps including the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO: Turn the knob to this position toautomatically turn on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

See Automatic Headlamp System on page 170 formore information.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps, together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turn the knob to this position toturn on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

You can switch the headlamps from low to highbeam by pushing the turn signal/multifunction levertoward the instrument panel.

Headlamps on ReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chime will sound whenthe headlamps or parking lamps are manuallyturned on and your key is out of the ignition. To turnoff the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off andthen back on. In the automatic mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK.

If your vehicle was first sold in Canada and theparking lamps are turned on manually, the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) will stay on.

169

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.The DRL system will come on when the followingconditions are met:• The ignition is on.• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.• The transmission is not in PARK (P) if you

have an automatic transmission.• The light sensor determines it is daytime.

Your vehicle will have either the parking lamps orreduced intensity low beams used as the DRL.When the DRL are on, only those lamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarkers, and other lamps willnot be on. The instrument panel will not be lit upeither.When it begins to get dark, the headlamps willautomatically switch from DRL to the regularheadlamps.As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system will turn on after thetransmission has been shifted from PARK (P) toDRIVE (D). The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,parking lamps, roof marker lamps, and theinstrument panel lights will turn on at normalbrightness. The radio lights will become more dimwhen the headlights are off compared to whenthe headlights are on.

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the topof the instrument panel. Be sure it is notcovered, or the system will be on whenever theignition is on.

The system may also turn on the headlamps whendriving through a parking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

170

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlampsystem so that driving under bridges or brightoverhead street lights does not affect the system.The DRL and automatic headlamp system will onlybe affected when the light sensor detects a changein lighting lasting longer than the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it willtake about one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrument panel cluster maynot be as bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness control is in the fullbright position. See Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 172.

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has fog lamps, you can use themfor better vision in foggy or misty conditions.Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlampsmust be on for your fog lamps to work.

The fog lamp button islocated near the exteriorlamps control.

Press the button to turn the fog lamps on whilethe headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press thebutton again to turn them off. An indicator lightwill glow in the button when the fog lamps are on.

Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off asmuch light as your headlamps. Never use your foglamps in the dark without turning on the headlamps.

The fog lamps will go off whenever yourhigh-beam headlamps come on. When the highbeams go off, the fog lamps will come on again.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

171

Exterior Cargo LampsThe cargo lamps can be used if more light isneeded in the cargo area of the vehicle or in thetop-box storage units.

Press this button,located on the driverside of the instrumentpanel near the exteriorlamp control, to turn thecargo lamps on and off.

The dome lamps must be on for the cargo lampsto come on. See Dome Lamp on page 173.

Interior LampsThe thumbwheel for the interior lamps is locatednext to the exterior lamps control. See ExteriorLamps on page 168 for additional information onlocation.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn thethumbwheel up or down to brighten or dim theinstrument panel lights and the radio display.The instrument panel lights, cluster, and radiodisplay do not dim to complete darkness.The instrument panel light brightness control willonly work if the headlamps or parking lampsare on. See Exterior Lamps on page 168.

172

Dome LampThe dome lamp will come on when a door isopened. They will shut off several seconds afterall doors are closed.

You can also turn the dome lamp on manually byturning the interior lamps thumbwheel all theway up. In this position, the dome lamp willremain on whether a door is opened or closed.See Interior Lamps on page 172 for additionalinformation on location.

Dome Lamp Override

E (Dome Override): Press this button, locatedbelow the exterior lamp control, to turn thedome lamp off even when a door is opened. SeeExterior Lamps on page 168 for more informationon location.

To return the lamp to automatic operation, pressthe button again.

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will come onwhen you remove the key from the ignition.The lamps will not come on if the dome overridebutton is pressed in.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you maysee the voltage move up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

173

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left onfor more than 20 minutes when the ignition isin LOCK. This will help prevent your battery fromrunning down.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets.

With accessory power outlets you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

Your vehicle may have two accessory power outletslocated on the lower part of the instrument panelbelow the climate control system and there may beone located on the rear of the center console.A small cap must be pulled down to access anaccessory power outlet. When not using an outletbe sure to cover it with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysunplug electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

174

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarettelighter.

Your ashtray is located in your center consolearea. The ashtray can be removed for cleaning.When the ashtray is removed, this area canalso be used as a cupholder.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and letgo. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

175

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

With this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

Temperature KnobThe left knob on the control panel is used toadjust the temperature of the air in the vehicle.Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the temperature.

Fan Knob

9 (Fan): The center knob on the control panel isused to control the fan speed. Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside airwill still enter the vehicle and will be directedaccording to the position of the mode knob.

Mode KnobThe right knob on the control panel is used todirect the airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knobto select one of the following modes:

H (Vent): Select this mode to direct air to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Select this mode to directapproximately half of the air to the instrumentpanel outlets, and the remaining air to thefloor outlets and the defroster and side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.

176

[ (Floor): Select this mode to direct air to thefloor outlets. Recirculation is disabled in this modebecause interior window could fog under someconditions. If this occurs, see “Defogging andDefrosting” following.

Mode Buttons@ (Recirculation): This mode recirculates airinside the cabin, and prevents outside air fromcoming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside odors from entering your vehicle andcool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Pressthis button to turn the recirculation mode on oroff. An indicator light on the button will come on tolet you know the recirculation mode is activated.

Recirculation is only available in the bi-leveland vent modes. It should only be used while inbi-level and vent modes. Recirculation is notavailable, and the light will not come on or flashwhile in heat, floor, floor/defog, or defrost modes.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button toturn the air conditioning system on or off. Anindicator light on the button will come on to let youknow the air conditioning is activated. When thesystem is on, this setting cools and dehumidifiesthe air entering your vehicle.

The air conditioning will not function if the fan isturned off.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from your windshield and sidewindows. Use the defog mode to clear the windowsof fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Usethe defrost mode to remove fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. For best results, clear allsnow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.

177

Turn the mode knob on the climate control panelclockwise to select the defog or defrost modes.

/ (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air to thewindshield, the side window outlets, and to the flooroutlets. When you select this mode, the systemruns the air conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is near freezing or below.Recirculation is not available in this mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield, and the side window outlets.When you select this mode, the system runs theair conditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is near, or below freezing.Recirculation is not available in this mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheel on the outlets to change thedirection of the air flow.

Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located inthe center of the outlet to direct the air up ordown, or slide the thumbwheel to the left or rightto direct the airflow from side-to-side.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of yourvehicle more effectively.

178

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the nextfew pages, some warning lights come on brieflywhen you start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly — and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lights andgages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle has a DIC that works along with thewarning lights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 196 for more information.

179

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things youwill need to know to drive safely and economically.

United States automatic transmission version shown, Canada similar

180

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles (used in the UnitedStates) or kilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply press the trip informationstem. See “Odometer” under DIC Controlsand Displays on page 196 for more information.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the newone can be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then it must be. But if it cannot, thenit is set at zero, and a label must be put onthe driver’s door to show the old mileage readingwhen the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerYour vehicle has a trip odometer that can tell youhow far your vehicle has been driven sinceyou last set the trip odometer to zero.

See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Controls andDisplays on page 196 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

181

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill be provided for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driversafety belt light will also be provided and stay onfor several seconds, then it will flash for severalmore. You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will be provided.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passengerairbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 86 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay onfor several seconds, then it will flash for severalmore. You should have the passenger buckle theirseat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

182

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystems, see Airbag System on page 76.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

183

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing child isso great if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


184

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

185

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 86 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 183.

Battery Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly when you startthe vehicle, as acheck to show you it isworking; then itshould go out.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked right away.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery and result in a vehicle that may stall. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 200 formore information.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and climate control system.

186

Up-Shift Light (ManualTransmission)

This light appears whenyou need to shift to thenext higher gear ona manual transmissionvehicle.

Shifting when the indicator light is on will help youget the best fuel economy. See “Up-Shift Light”under Manual Transmission Operation onpage 124 for more information.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be abrake problem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. See Parking Brake on page 130 formore information. The light will stay on if yourparking brake does not release fully. If it stays onafter your parking brake is fully released, itmeans you have a brake problem.


187

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 297.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS),this light will come onbriefly when you startyour engine to show it isworking. Then it will turnoff. This is normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you stillhave brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.If the regular brake system warning light is alsoon, you do not have anti-lock brakes and there is aproblem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 187.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to ON. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

188

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows theengine coolanttemperature.

If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage, theengine is too hot. It means that your enginecoolant has overheated. If you have beenoperating your vehicle under normal drivingconditions, you should pull off the road, stopyour vehicle and turn off the engine as soonas possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 348 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Light

This light should comeon briefly when you turnthe ignition to ON.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated. A LOWTIRE message will also appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 200 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 377 for more information.

This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turnon solid if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 386 for more information.

189

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 323.

190

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 328.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

191

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 325. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

192

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The light will come onwhen you turn your keyto ON or START.

It goes off once you start your engine. That is acheck to be sure the light works. If it doesnot come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will bethere to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through the engine properly.The vehicle could be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem. See Engine Oilon page 333 and “OIL” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

193

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe key to START. Thelight will stay on untilthe engine starts.

If the ignition is turned on, and the light flashes,the Passlock® system has entered a tamper mode.If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock® onpage 114.

If the light comes on continuously while drivingand stays on, there may be a problem withthe Passlock® system. Your vehicle will not beprotected by Passlock®, and you should seeyour dealer.

Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 113 foradditional information regarding the security light.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 164 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever thehigh-beam headlampsare on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 163 for more information.

194

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light turns onwhenever the DaytimeRunning Lamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 170for more information.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on,the fuel gage tells youabout how muchfuel you have remainingin the fuel tank.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these indicate a problem with yourfuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full, butit actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage does not go back to empty whenyou turn off the ignition.

When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will seea LOW FUEL message on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 200 for more information.

195

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) displaysinformation such as the trip odometer,personalization features, and warning messages.The DIC display is located on the instrumentpanel cluster.

DIC Controls and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) comes onwhen the ignition is on.

If a problem is detected, a warning message willappear on the display. Pressing and releasingthe trip odometer reset stem on the DIC willacknowledge some current warnings or servicemessages. Some messages will only clearafter the required action has been taken.

The DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stemon the DIC. These modes are explained in thefollowing section. The DIC trip odometer reset stemis located on the instrument panel cluster next tothe DIC display. To scroll through the availablefunctions, press and release the reset stem.

Trip InformationOdometerThe odometer is automatically displayed on theDIC when you start the vehicle. The odometershows the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles for the United States orkilometers for Canada.

Trip OdometerPress and release the reset stem until TRIPappears on the DIC display. The trip odometershows the current distance traveled since the lastreset of the trip odometer in either miles for theUnited States or kilometers for Canada.

Press and hold the reset stem for aboutfour seconds to reset the trip odometer.

196

Engine Oil Life SystemWith the engine off, turn the key to ON and thenpress the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESETappears — alternating between OIL LIFE andRESET — on the DIC display. The CHANGE OILmessage will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.Always reset the OIL LIFE message after anoil change. To reset the message, see Engine OilLife System on page 336.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual.See Engine Oil on page 333 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 445 for more information.

LanguageThis feature allows you to choose the language inwhich the DIC display will show information.

To set your choice for this feature, perform thefollowing steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON.

2. Close all doors and make sure that theDOORS message is not displayed in the DIC.

3. Press and release the reset stem untilthe language is shown on the DIC display.

4. To view the next available language, press andhold the reset stem for about two seconds.Release the reset stem and press and holdagain to view each language. You can choosefrom English (default), Spanish, or French.

5. Once the desired language is shown on theDIC display, briefly press the reset stem toset your choice.

197

Automatic Door LocksThis feature allows you to program your doorlocks to a preferred setting.


1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.Do not remove the key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the power door lock button forabout three seconds until the DIC displayshows the current door lock mode.

3. To view the next available mode, press andhold the reset stem for about two seconds.Release the reset stem and press andhold again to view each mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DICdisplay, briefly press the reset stem to setyour choice. The DIC display will then clear.

The following are the available modes:

Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatictransmission, this mode locks all of the doorswhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) andunlocks all of the doors when the vehicle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

On vehicles with a manual transmission, thismode locks all of the doors when the vehiclespeed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) andunlocks all of the doors when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatictransmission, this mode locks all of the doorswhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) andunlocks the driver’s door when the vehicle isshifted into PARK (P).

On vehicles with a manual transmission, thismode locks all of the doors when the vehiclespeed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) andunlocks the driver’s door when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatictransmission, this mode locks all of the doorswhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P). Thedoors will not automatically unlock.

On vehicles with a manual transmission, thismode locks all of the doors when the vehiclespeed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doorswill not automatically unlock.

198

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FeedbackThis feature allows you to program your RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) feedback to a preferredsetting.


1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.Do not remove the key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the RKE transmitter at the same time.Hold both buttons until the DIC display showsthe current RKE feedback mode.

3. To view the next available mode, press andhold the reset stem for about two seconds.Release the reset stem and press andhold again to view each mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DICdisplay, briefly press the reset stem to setyour choice. The DIC display will then clear.

The following are the available modes:

RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes the parkinglamps when you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.

RFA 2: This mode flashes the parking lamps andsounds the horn when you press the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter. This mode also flashes theparking lamps when you press the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter.

RFA 3: This mode flashes the parking lamps andsounds the horn when you press the lock orunlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.

RFA 4: This mode disables RKE feedback. Therewill be no feedback when you press the lock orunlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.

199

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another. The messages aredisplayed for four seconds each.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you should press and release the tripodometer reset stem to acknowledge that youreceived the messages and to clear them from thedisplay. Each message must be acknowledgedindividually.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared. You should take any messages thatappear on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

AC (Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too high and the air conditioning inyour vehicle needs to be turned off. See EngineOverheating on page 348 and Climate ControlSystem on page 176 for more information. Thismessage displays along with the ENG HOTmessage.

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) FAULTThis message displays if there is a problemwith the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Check theABS as soon as possible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer. See Brakes on page 357and Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light onpage 188 for more information. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge the messageand clear it from the display.

200

BRAKESThis message displays if there is a problem withthe brakes. Check the brakes as soon as possibleand have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.See Brakes on page 357 and Brake SystemWarning Light on page 187 for more information.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

CHANGE OILThis message displays when the oil needs to bechanged. Check the oil in your vehicle as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Engine Oil on page 333 andScheduled Maintenance on page 445 for moreinformation. Press and release the reset stem toacknowledge the message and clear it fromthe display.

DOORSThis message displays when one or more of thedoors is ajar. Check all the doors on yourvehicle to make sure they are closed. Themessage clears from the display after all of thedoors are closed.

ENG (Engine) HOTThis message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is hot. Check the engine coolanttemperature gage. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 189. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible if you suspect the engine is overheating.See Engine Overheating on page 348 for moreinformation.

FLUIDThis message displays if the brake fluid is low.Check the brake fluid as soon as possibleand have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.See Brakes on page 357 for more information.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

201

FUEL CAPThis message displays if the vehicle’s fuel cap iseither off or loose. Pull over as soon as possibleand check to see if the fuel cap is secure. You mayalso see the check engine light on the instrumentpanel cluster. If the check engine light doescome on when the fuel cap was loose, it may takea few driving trips before the light turns off. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 190 for moreinformation if the light still remains on. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display.

LOW FUELThis message displays if the level of fuel in thevehicle is low. Also check the fuel gage. See FuelGage on page 195 for more information. Refillthe fuel tank as soon as possible.

LOW TIREThis message displays if a low tire pressure isdetected in any of the vehicle’s tires. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display. Themessage appears at each ignition cycle until thetires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.See Tires on page 377 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 385 for more information ontires and the correct inflation pressures.

LOW TRAC (Traction)If your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when a lowtraction condition is detected. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253 for moreinformation. Press and release the reset stem toacknowledge the message and clear it fromthe display.

OILThis message displays when the oil pressure islow. See Oil Pressure Light on page 193 andEngine Oil on page 333 for more information.

202

PARK BRK (Brake)This message displays when the parking brake isset. See Parking Brake on page 130 and BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 187 for moreinformation. The message clears from the displayafter the parking brake is released or bypressing and releasing the reset stem.

REDUCED POWERThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

SERV (Service) 4WD(Four-Wheel Drive)This message displays when there is a problemwith the transfer case control system. Check thetransfer case on your vehicle and have it servicedby your dealer. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 126for more information about the transfer case. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display.

SERV (Service) TPM(Tire Pressure Monitor)This message displays if any of the tire monitorsensors have malfunctioned, if the tire monitorsensors have not been programmed, or ifthe recommended tire pressures are notprogrammed. The tire pressure light also flashesfor one minute and then turns on solid untilthe condition goes away or the system is serviced.See Tire Pressure Light on page 189. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display. Thismessage appears at each ignition cycle until thesystem is serviced. See your dealer for service.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 386 formore information.

203

SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)This message displays if your vehicle needsservice. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.

SERVICE CHARG (Charge) SYS(System)This message displays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Under certainconditions, the battery warning light may also turnon in the instrument panel cluster. See BatteryWarning Light on page 186. The battery will not becharging at an optimal rate and the vehicle willlose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode.The vehicle is safe to drive, however havethe electrical system checked by your dealer.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

TRACTION FAULTIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message may display if there isa problem with the TCS. Check the TCS as soonas possible and have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 253 for more information. Press andrelease the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display.

TURN SIGNALThis message displays when the turn signal is onfor about 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display.

204

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 246. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 246.

205

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functions ofyour vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system. If that equipment isreplaced or additional equipment is added toyour vehicle, the chimes may not work. Makesure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with your vehicle before installingit. See Accessories and Modifications onpage 323.

Setting the Time for Radios withoutRadio Data Systems (RDS)Press and hold HR (hour) until the correct hourappears on the display. Press and hold MIN(minute) until the correct minute appears on thedisplay. There is an initial two-second delay beforethe clock goes into time-set mode. Display thetime with the ignition off, by pressing RCL (recall),HR, or MIN.

206

Setting the Time for Radios withRadio Data Systems (RDS)The radio may have a button marked with an H orHR to represent hours and an M or MN torepresent minutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correcthour appears on the display. Press and holdthe minute button until the correct minute appearson the display. The time can be set with theignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the hour and minutebuttons at the same time until RDS TIME appearson the display. To accept this time, press andhold the hour and minute buttons, at the sametime, for another two seconds. If the time isnot available from the station, NO UPDAT (update)will appear on the display.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Aftertuning to an RDS broadcast station, it may take afew minutes for the time to update.

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency, band,and the time. When the ignition is off, press thisknob to display the time.

207

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

oSEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to goto the next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrowfor two seconds until a beep sounds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrowagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than four seconds untiltwo beeps sound. The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the next preset station. Presseither SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

208

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: To adjust bass or treble, press andrelease AUDIO until BAS (bass) or TRE (treble)displays. Then press and hold the up or the downarrow to increase or to decrease the tone. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BAS (bass) or TRE (treble). Then press andhold AUDIO for more than two seconds until abeep sounds. B (balance) and a zero or T (treble)and a zero displays.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first exit out of audiomode by pressing another button, causing the radioto perform that function or wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, press and releaseAUDIO until BAL (balance) displays. Then pressand hold the up or the down arrow to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and therear speakers, press and release AUDIO untilFAD (fade) displays. Then press and hold the upor the down arrow to move the sound towardthe front or the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FAD. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until a beepsounds. B (balance) and a zero or F (fade) and azero displays.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first exit out of audiomode by pressing another button, causing the radioto perform that function or wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.

Fade might not be available if the vehicle is aregular cab model.

209

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CALdisplays it means that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for your vehicle and must bereturned to your dealer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

210

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the displayinstead of the frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)for current programming, and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

211

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increaseor to decrease the volume.

DISPL (Display): When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change whatappears on the display while using RDS. Thedisplay options are station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY (program type), and the name ofthe program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knobwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISPL knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold this knob for two seconds. Theradio produces one beep. The selected display isnow the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Automaticvolume automatically adjusts the audio system tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Pressthis button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.AVOL appears on the display. Each higher settingallows for more volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds. Then as you drive, automaticvolume increases the volume, as necessary, toovercome noise at any speed. The volumelevel should always sound the same to you as youdrive. NONE appears on the display if the radiocannot determine the vehicle speed. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button until OFFappears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radiostations.

212

q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow togo to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

q SCAN r: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCAN appears onthe display and the radio produces one beep. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherarrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stopscanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds. PSCN appears on thedisplay and the radio produces one beep. The radiogoes to a preset station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station. Press eitherarrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stopscanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.


4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set returns andthe equalization that was selected is storedfor that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

213

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob untilBASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn theknob to increase or to decrease. The tone displayshows the bass or the treble level. If a station isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass and the treble to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob. A beepwill sound.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control displays. ALLCENTERED appears on the display and you willhear a beep.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the AUTO EQ button untilCUSTOM appears on the display.


AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and release theAUDIO knob until BAL (balance) appears onthe display. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob untilFADE appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the front or the rearspeakers.

To adjust the balance or the fade to the middleposition, push the AUDIO knob to select BAL orFADE, then push it again and hold it until you hearone beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.ALL CENTERED appears on the display and youwill hear a beep.

214

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate programtype select mode. TYPE and a PTY appearson the display.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays, press theSEEK TYPE button to select and to takeyou to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY,press the SEEK TYPE button twice todisplay the PTY and then go to anotherstation.

5. Press P-TYPE knob to exit program typeselect mode.IF PTY disappears on the display, go back toStep 1.

If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected PTYand traffic announcements.

If the radio cannot find the desired program type,NONE appears on the display and the radioreturns to the last tuned station.

BAND (AF– Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. AF ON appears on the display. Theradio could switch to stations with a strongerfrequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF appears onthe display. The radio does not switch to otherstations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

215

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!appears on the display. You will hear theannouncement, even if the volume is low or a CDis playing. If a CD is playing, play stops duringthe announcement. Alert announcements cannotbe turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol appears onthe display. Press this button to see the message.The message may display the artist, song title,call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words appears onthe display after every press of this button.Once the complete message has been displayed,the information symbol disappears from thedisplay until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button. The last message stays onthe display until a new message is received or theradio is tuned to a different station.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO appears on the display.

216

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.When a traffic announcement is broadcast on thisstation you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found, theradio stops seeking and TRAF appears on thedisplay. If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAF appears on the display.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CDif the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR appears on the displayit means that the radio has not been configuredproperly for your vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take yourvehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 240 later in thissection for further detail.

217

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING appearson the display. The CD should begin playing. If youwant to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts to play where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the display. As each new track starts toplay, the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.

There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 243 formore information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

218

1 FLD x (Previous): This button is inactivewhen playing a CD.

2 FLD w (Next): This button is inactive whenplaying a CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Press and holdthis pushbutton for less than two seconds toreverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.ET (elapsed time) and the elapsed time ofthe track appears on the display.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track appears onthe display.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM ON appears on the display. RDM and thetrack number appears on the display when eachtrack starts to play. Press RDM again to turn offrandom play. RDM OFF appears on the display.

q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current or the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track.Pressing either arrow for more than two secondsscans the next tracks, playing the firsteight seconds of each track until all of the trackshave been previewed. Press the button againto stop scanning and to play the track.

o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fasttrack reverse or advance through tracks. The tracknumber appears on the display for each track.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. ET and theelapsed time of the track appears on the display.To change the default on the display (track orelapsed time), press this knob until you see thedesired display, then press and hold the knobfor two seconds. The radio produces one beep.The selected display is now the default.

219

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symbolappears on the display when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radiooff if this button is pressed first.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 234 later in this section.

CD MessagesCHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to

normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road. When the

road becomes smoother, the CD should play.• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or

upside down.• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour

and try again.• The format of the CD may not be compatible.

See Using an MP3 on page 234 later in thissection.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

220

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the displayinstead of the frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)for current programming, and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

221

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the systemon and off.

o VOLUME p: Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

INFO (Information) (XM™ Satellite RadioService and RDS Features): When the ignition isoff, press this knob to display the time.

Press the INFO button to display additional textinformation related to the current FM-RDS or XM™station. A choice of additional information suchas: Channel, Song, Artist, and PTY (program type)may appear. Continue pressing the informationbutton to highlight the desired label, and theinformation about that label displays.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

To change the default on the display, press theINFO knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold the knob until you hear a beep. Theselected display becomes the default.

222

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium), orMAX. AUTO VOL (maximum automatic volume)appears on the display. Each higher settingprovides more volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume off,press this button until AUTO VOL OFF appearson the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

oTUNE p: Turn this knob to select radiostations.

©SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPEarrows to go to the next or to the previousstation and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCNappears on the display and you hear a beep. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherthe SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stopscanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherthe SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more thanfour seconds. PSC appears on the display and youwill hear a double beep. The radio goes to apreset station, plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. Press either theSCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop scanningpresets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

223

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2 (if equipped).


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set returns forthat pushbutton.


To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button toselect the equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer appears onthe display, the equalization is set for thatpreset station.

3. To resave the preset, press and hold thepreset button until a beep is heard.

224

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob untilBASS, MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turnthe knob to increase or to decrease. The displayshows the bass, midrange, or treble level. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob.The radio produces one beep and adjusts thedisplay level to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker controls are displayed.ALL CENTERED appears on the display and youwill hear a beep.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOEQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.Then manually adjust the bass, midrange, andtreble using the AUDIO knob.


AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and release theAUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob untilFAD appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the front or the rearspeakers.

The fade feature may not be available on all radiosystems.

To adjust the balance or fade to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob whileBAL or FAD is displayed. The radio producesone beep and adjusts the display level tothe middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhile no tone or speaker controls are displayed.ALL CENTERED appears on the display andyou will hear a beep.

225

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. P-TYPE and the lastselected PTY appears on the display.

2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release theTYPE button to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, presseither the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to selectand to take you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To cancel the seek, press any of the TYPE orSEEK arrows. This also exits the programtype seek mode and returns to the last tunedstation.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows fortwo seconds, and the radio begins scanningthe stations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows tostop scanning.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. AF ON appears on the display.The radio may switch to stations with a strongerfrequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF appears onthe display. The radio does not switch to otherstations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

226

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets.Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the PTY that was set returns.


RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO appears on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message maydisplay the artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words appears onthe display after every press of this button.Once the complete message has displayed, INFOdisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. Youcan view the last message until a new message isreceived or a different station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO appears on the display.

227

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, itmeans that the radio has not been configuredproperly for the vehicle and must be returned toyour dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 240 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the display. As each new track starts toplay, the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 243 for more information.


228


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player holds up to six CDs.To insert one CD, do the following:1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and release the LOAD button.3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right

of the slot, to turn green.4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,

label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep will sound and the indicator light,located to the right of the slot, begins to flashand MULTI LOAD # appears on the display.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # appears on the display, load aCD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the indicatorlight begins flashing again. Once the lightstops flashing and turns green, you can loadanother CD. The CD player takes up tosix CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the LOAD button to cancel the loadingfunction. The radio begins to play the last CDloaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD appears on the display.

229

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number appears on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press theCD AUX button (if not already in CD mode), thenpress the numbered pushbutton that correspondsto the CD. A small bar appears under the CDnumber that is playing and the track numberappears on the display.If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

CDZ (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).To eject the CD that is currently playing, pressand release this button.To eject multiple CDs, do the following:1. Press and hold the CD eject button for

five seconds.A beep will sound and the indicator light,located to the right of the slot, begins to flashand EJECT ALL appears on the display.

2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #appears on the display. The CD ejects andcan be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator lightbegins flashing again and another CD ejects.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOADor the eject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, theCD automatically pulls back into the player. If CDis pushed back into the player, before the25 second time period is complete, the playersenses an error and tries to eject the CD severaltimes before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to ejecta CD after you have tried to push it in manually. Theplayer’s 25-second eject timer resets at each pressof eject, causing the player to not eject the CD untilthe 25-second time period has elapsed.

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. The elapsed time ofthe track appears on the display. Release thebutton to play the passage.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. The elapsed time ofthe track appears on the display. Release thebutton to play the passage.

230

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. RPT appears onthe display. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.RPT appears on the display. Press RPT againto turn off repeat play.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order, on one CD or on all of the CDs. To userandom, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release the RDMbutton. RANDOM ONE appears on the display.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and hold RDMfor more than two seconds. You will hear abeep and RANDOM ALL appears on thedisplay. Press RDM again to turn offrandom play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the startof the current track (if more than 10 seconds haveplayed), or to go to the previous track (if less than10 seconds have played). Press the right arrow togo to the next track. If either arrow is held orpressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Presseither SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CDSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds ofthe first track of each loaded CD. Press eitherSCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

231

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see howlong the current track has been playing. To changethe default on the display, track or elapsed time,press the knob until you see the desired display,then press and hold the knob until the radio beeps.The selected display becomes the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not appear onthe display. If S-LIST is present, press theSONG LIST button to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKor TYPE right arrow to locate the track tobe saved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button tosave the track into memory. When SONGLIST is pressed, one beep will sound.After two seconds of continuously pressingthe SONG LIST button, two beeps will soundto confirm the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

S-LIST FULL appears on the display if you try tosave more than 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep will sound and S-LIST appearson the display. The recorded tracks begins toplay in the order they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK orTYPE arrows. Seeking past the last savedtrack returns to the first saved track.

232

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST appears on the display.

3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to selectthe desired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button fortwo seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep will sound. After two secondsof continuously pressing the SONG LISTbutton, two beeps will sound to confirm thatthe track has been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform the followingsteps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST appears on the display.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for morethan four seconds. One beep will sound,followed by two beeps after two seconds, and afinal beep will sound after four seconds. S-LISTEMPTY appears on the display indicating thesong list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep will sound and S-LIST isremoved from the display.

233

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension, other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are displayed by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

234

The player is able to read and play a maximumof 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlistnames may use more disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space on the disc,minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are played.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory displays as F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessedprior to any root directory folders. However,playlists (Px) are always accessed before rootfolders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions have no function ona CD that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first andthen go to the root folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder, the radio displays ROOT.

235

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. See DISPL (display) later in thissection for more information. The new track nameappears on the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists which were created byWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited. These playlists are treated as specialfolders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING appearson the display. The CD should begin playing andthe CD symbol appears on the display. If youwant to insert a CD with the ignition off, first pressthe eject button or the DISPL knob.

236

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts to play where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberappears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 243Care of Your CDs for more information.



Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press thispushbutton to go to the first track in the previousfolder. Pressing this button while in folderrandom mode takes you to the previous folder andplays the tracks in random order in that folder.

2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton togo to the first track in the next folder. Pressingthis button while in folder random mode takes theCD to the next folder and plays the tracks inrandom order in that folder.

237

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Press and holdthis pushbutton for less than two seconds toreverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage. REVand the elapsed time of the track appears onthe display.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.FWD and the elapsed time of the track appearson the display.

6 RDM (Random): To play the tracks in randomorder in the current folder or playlist, press andrelease this pushbutton. FLDR RDM (folderrandom) appears on the display. Once all of thetracks in the current folder or playlist have beenplayed the system moves to the next folder orplaylist and plays all of the tracks in random order.

To play all the tracks in random order on the CD,press and hold this pushbutton for two seconds.You will hear a beep and DISC RDM (disc random)appears on the display. This feature does not workwith playlists.

When in random, pressing and releasing eitherSEEK arrow takes the CD to the next or previousrandom track.

Press and release this pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. NO RDM (no random) appears on thedisplay.

q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the previous track. Press the right arrow togo to the start of the next track. Pressing eitherarrow for more than two seconds searchesthe previous or next tracks at two tracks persecond. Release the button to stop searching andto play the track.

o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fasttrack reverse or advance through the tracks in allfolders or playlists. The track number and filename appears on the display for each track.Turning this knob while in random will fast trackreverse or advance the tracks in sequential order.

238

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switchbetween track mode, folder/playlist mode, andtime of day mode. The display shows onlyeight characters, but there can be up to four pagesof text. If there are more than eight charactersin the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing thisknob within two seconds takes you to the nextpage of text. If there are no other pages tobe shown, pressing this knob within two secondstakes you to the next display mode.

• Track mode displays the current track numberand the ID3 tag song name.

• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folderor playlist number and the folder/playlist name.

• Time of day mode displays the time of day andthe ID3 tag song name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISPL knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold this knob for two seconds. Theradio produces one beep and the selected displayis now the default.

INFO (Information): INFO appears on the displaywhenever a current track has ID3 tag information.Press this button to display the artist nameand album contained in the tag. INFO disappearsfrom the display when the information in theID3 tag has finished being read.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symbolilluminates on the display when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectcan activate while either the ignition or radio isoff. CDs can be loaded with the ignition and radiooff if this button is pressed first.

239

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and textdata. No action is needed. This message should disappearshortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavl Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

240

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

NotFound No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

241

Theft-Deterrent Feature(Non-RDS Radios)THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOC will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Theft-Deterrent Feature(RDS Radios)THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCKED will appear on the display.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, theblinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK®

is armed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

242

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio may display No Signl to indicateinterference.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

243

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to the fender. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand, then with a wrenchone quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume level willchange from the normal level to loud, andLOUD will appear on the radio display. To changeback to the default or normal setting, press andhold pushbutton 6 again. The volume levelwill change from the loud level to normal, andNORMAL will appear on the radio display.Each time the chime volume is changed,three chimes will sound to indicate the newvolume selected. Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio or chime modulewill disable vehicle chimes.

244

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 246Defensive Driving ...................................... 246Drunken Driving ........................................ 247Control of a Vehicle .................................. 250Braking ...................................................... 250Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 251Braking in Emergencies ............................. 253Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 253Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 254Steering .................................................... 255Off-Road Recovery .................................... 257Passing ..................................................... 257Loss of Control .......................................... 259Off-Road Driving ........................................ 260Driving at Night ......................................... 274Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 275City Driving ............................................... 278Freeway Driving ........................................ 279

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 280Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 281Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 282Winter Driving ........................................... 284If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 288Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 288Recovery Hooks ........................................ 289Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 290Truck-Camper Loading Information ............ 296Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ............ 296

Towing ........................................................ 297Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 297Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 297Towing a Trailer ........................................ 305Trailer Recommendations .......................... 318

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

245

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

246

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

247

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

248

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

249

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 323.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 187.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

250

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith the ABS, thiswarning light will stayon. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 188.

251

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

252

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayfeel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice somenoise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both of therear wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system reducesengine power and may also upshift thetransmission to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

The TCS button islocated on yourinstrument panel. Pressthis button to turn theTCS off and on.

When the traction control system is turned off,an indicator light on the button will illuminate.

253

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control onpage 164.

TCS operates in all transmission shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift thetransmission only as high as the shift lever positionyou have chosen, so you should use the lowergears only when necessary. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 120 and/orManual Transmission Operation on page 124 formore information.

If there is a problem with TCS, TRACTION FAULTwill be displayed on your Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 200 for more information.

When this warning is displayed, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave TCS on.But you can turn the system off if you ever need to.You should turn the system off if your vehicleever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See Rocking YourVehicle to Get It Out on page 288 and If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 288 for more information.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 323 for more information.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleIf your vehicle has this feature, your limited-sliprear axle can give you additional traction on snow,mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standardaxle most of the time, but when one of therear wheels has no traction and the other does,this feature will allow the wheel with tractionto move the vehicle.

254

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehiclethe way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will want togo slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


255

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 250. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

256

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

257

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

258

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

259

Off-Road DrivingThis off-road guide is for vehicles that havefour-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 250and Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 251.If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive,you should not drive off-road unless you are on alevel, solid surface.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these isthe terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the great NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes are notmarked. Curves are not banked. There are no roadsigns. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, ordownhill. In short, you have gone right back tonature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. Andthat is why it is very important that you read thisguide. You will find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Check tomake sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle hasthem, are properly attached. Be sure you readall the information about your four-wheel-drivevehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is thespare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels upwhere they should be? What are the locallaws that apply to off-roading where you will bedriving? If you do not know, you should check withlaw enforcement people in the area. Will you beon someone’s private land? If so, be sure toget the necessary permission.

260

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. You oryour passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor canbe tossed about when driving overrough terrain. You or your passengerscan be struck by flying objects.Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, making itmore likely to roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured if thevehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and forward of the rear axle. Putheavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, sodriving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 290and Tires on page 377.

261

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, and areasthat have been specially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving; obey allposted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground.

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuseis removed from any campsite before leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires wherepermitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or othercombustible materials that could catch fire fromthe heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain and planyour route. You are much less likely to get badsurprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain.Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at leastone other vehicle. If something happens to one ofthem, the other can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure toread the winch instructions. In a remote area, awinch can be handy if you get stuck. But you willwant to know how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that issafe and close to home before you go intothe wilderness. Off-road driving does require somenew and different skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweepthe terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands, feet, and body, you willneed to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.

262

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways to controlyour vehicle is to control your speed. Here aresome things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:

• You approach things faster and you have lesstime to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when you driveover obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash. So, whetheryou are driving on or off the road, you andyour passengers should wear safety belts.

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features.Here are some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the steering, acceleration, and braking ofyour vehicle in different ways. Depending upon thekind of surface you are on, you may experienceslipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayedacceleration, poor traction, and longer brakingdistances.

263

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not prepared forthem. Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall ofthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptlyup ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjectslater.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,troughs, or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands if you are notprepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, your wheels can leave the ground.If this happens, even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kindof alertness from driving on paved roads andhighways. There are no road signs, posted speedlimits, or signal lights. You have to use yourown good judgment about what is safe andwhat is not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous onany road. And this is certainly true for off-roaddriving. At the very time you need special alertnessand driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,and judgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have a serious — oreven fatal — accident if you drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.See Drunken Driving on page 247.

264

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are some hillsthat simply cannot be driven, no matter howwell built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall.If you drive down them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive across them, youwill roll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have any doubtabout the steepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if itis one of those hills that is just too steep toclimb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hardto judge. On a very small hill, for example,

there may be a smooth, constant incline with onlya small change in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,the incline may get steeper as you near thetop, but you may not see this because the crest ofthe hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider asyou approach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that can blockyour path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know. It is the smartway to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocksbecause they are more susceptible to theeffects of erosion.

265

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill,you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain your speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantyour wheels to start spinning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of thehill to let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day.They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

266

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, and I cannot make itup the hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do, and there are some things youmust not do. First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it from rolling backwards. Also, applythe parking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift thetransmission to REVERSE (R), release theparking brake, and slowly back down thehill in REVERSE (R).

• If your engine has stopped running, you willneed to restart it. With the brake pedalpressed and the parking brake still applied,shift the transmission to PARK (P), or shift toNEUTRAL if your vehicle has a manualtransmission, and restart the engine. Then,shift to REVERSE (R), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back down the hill asstraight as possible in REVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way, you will be able to tell if thewheels are straight and maneuver as you backdown. It is best that you back down the hill withthe wheels straight rather than in the left or rightdirection. Turning the wheel too far to the left orright will increase the possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting intoNEUTRAL (N), or pressing the clutch if yourvehicle has a manual transmission, to rev-upthe engine and regain forward momentum. Thiswill not work. Your vehicle will roll backwardsvery quickly and you could go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stop thevehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are about tostall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enoughto cause you to roll over if you turn around. Ifyou cannot make it up the hill, you must backstraight down the hill.

267

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it.What should I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put the automatictransmission in PARK (P), or the manualtransmission in FIRST (1), and turn offthe engine. Leave the vehicle and go getsome help. Exit on the uphill side andstay clear of the path the vehicle would take ifit rolled downhill.

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will wantto consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able tomaintain vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way, engine drag can helpthe brakes and they will not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicleunder control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.

268

Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control andhave a serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the incline of the hill. A hill thatis not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. You could roll overif you do not drive straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedalpressed down with a manual transmission.This is called “free-wheeling.” The brakes willhave to do all the work and could overheatand fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen goinguphill. But if it happens going downhill, here iswhat to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P), or to NEUTRAL with themanual transmission, and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.

269

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up or downmay be too steep to drive across. When yougo straight up or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance from the frontwheels to the rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.But when you drive across an incline, the muchmore narrow track width — the distancebetween the left and right wheels — may notprevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem when youdrive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,or even wet grass can cause your tires to slipsideways, downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit something that willtrip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steepwill make your vehicle roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it. Findanother route instead.

270

Q: What if I am driving across an incline thatis not too steep, but I hit some loosegravel and start to slide downhill.What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. However, a much better way toprevent this is to get out and “walk the course”so you know what the surface is like beforeyou drive it.

Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing anincline, be sure you, and any passengers, get outon the uphill side, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out on the downhill sideand the vehicle starts to roll over, you will beright in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of thepath the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

271

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, your wheelswill not get good traction. You cannot accelerate asquickly, turning is more difficult, and you will needlonger braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehiclemoving so you do not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This hasan effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction is sopoor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And ifyou do get moving, poor steering and difficultbraking can cause you to slide out of control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drivethrough it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheelhubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — youprobably will not get through. Also, water that deepcan damage the axle and other vehicle parts.

272

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get the tailpipe under water. And,as long as the tailpipe is under water, you willnever be able to start the engine. When you gothrough water, remember that when the brakes getwet, it may take you longer to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 275for more information on driving through water.

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collected onthe underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Check thebody structure, steering, suspension, wheels,tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the maintenanceschedule for additional information.

273

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

274

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

275

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even ifyour windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of theroad, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in goodshape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replaceyour windshield wiper inserts when they showsigns of streaking or missing areas on thewindshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

276

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 377.

277

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 279.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a lightturns green, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

278

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

279

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slower thanyou actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

280

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

281

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.See Off-Road Driving on page 260 for informationabout driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid levels and also the brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission. These parts canwork hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

282

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.There could be something in your lane, like astalled car or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

283

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 377.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

284

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 251.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

285

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

286

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

287

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels aslittle as possible. Do not spin the wheelsabove 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting thetransmission back and forth, you can destroythe transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 400.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shiftinto 4HI. If your vehicle has traction control, turnthe traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) anda forward gear, or with a manual transmission,between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) andREVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal whileyou shift, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in gear.

288

By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward andreverse directions, you will cause a rockingmotion that may free your vehicle. If that does notget your vehicle out after a few tries, it mayneed to be towed out.Or, you can use the recoveryhooks if your vehicle has them. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 297.

Recovery Hooks

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lotof force. Always pull the vehicle straightout. Never pull on the hooks at asideways angle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered by warranty.

Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the frontof the vehicle. You may need to use them if youare stuck off-road and need to be pulled tosome place where you can continue driving.

289

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tireand Loading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door latch post.Vehicle’s without a center pillar, like extended cabmodels, will have the Tire and Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’s side extended cabdoor, above the door latch post.

Label Example

290

The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), andthe maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 377 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 385.

There is also important information on theCertification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rearaxles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in thissection.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.See Towing a Trailer on page 305 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety,and trailering tips.

291

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)


Example 1 Example 2

292




1,000 lbs (453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo,and any accessories or equipment added to yourvehicle after it left the factory should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to the bottom section of the center pillar,on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Vehicleswithout a center pillar, like extended cab models,will have the Certification/Tire label attachedto the edge of the driver’s side, extended cab door,below the door latch post. The label shows theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Example 3

Label Example

293

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongueweight, if pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To findout the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

If you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

Similar appearing vehicles may have differentGVWRs and capacity weights. Please note yourvehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consultyour dealer for additional details.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your weightratings. Ask your dealer to help you loadyour vehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

294

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

There is also important loading information foroff-road driving in this manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-RoadDriving on page 260.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weightrating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

Two-Tiered LoadingBy positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks acrossthe width of the pickup box, you can create anupper load platform. The planks must be insertedin the pickup box depressions. The length ofthe planks must allow for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm)bearing surface on each end of the plank.

When using this upper load platform, be sure theload is securely tied down to prevent it fromshifting. The load’s center of gravity should bepositioned in a zone over the rear axle.

Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’staillamp area must be properly marked accordingto local laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

295

Add-On EquipmentWhen you carry removable items, you may needto put a limit on how many people you carryinside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install the new equipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

A reinforcement kit for mounting a toolbox isrecommended. See your dealer.

Truck-Camper Loading InformationYour vehicle was not designed to carry aslide-in camper.

Pickup Conversion to Chassis CabGeneral Motors is aware that some vehicleowners may consider having the pickup boxremoved and a commercial or recreational bodyinstalled. However, we recommend thatconversions of this type not be done to pickups.Owners should be aware that, as manufactured,there are differences between a chassis cab and apickup with the box removed which may affectvehicle safety.

296

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 470.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy”(towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground) and “dolly” (towing your vehicle withtwo wheels on the ground and two wheels up on adevice known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed.

297

Dinghy TowingTwo-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed withall four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisions for internallubrication while being towed.

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Drive the vehicle to be towed into positionbehind the tow vehicle.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 130 for more information.

298

3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) ora manual transmission in FIRST (1).

4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL can causeyour vehicle to roll even if the transmissionis in PARK (P) for an automatictransmission, or if your vehicle is in gear,for a manual transmission. You or otherscould be injured. Make sure the parkingbrake is firmly set before you shift thetransfer case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.See Four-Wheel Drive on page 126 formore information.

6. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe tow vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.If the tow vehicle will not be started or drivenfor six weeks or more, remove the batterycable from the negative terminal (post) of thebattery to prevent your battery from drainingwhile towing.

After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” underFour-Wheel Drive on page 126.

299

Dolly TowingFront Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheelson the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed withthe rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisions for internallubrication while being towed. To dolly towa two-wheel-drive vehicle, you must tow thevehicle with the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)”later in this section for more information.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dolly tow yourvehicle from the front:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.


300


4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL can causeyour vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P) for anautomatic transmission, or if your vehicleis in gear, for a manual transmission. Youor others could be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set before you shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL.




After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” underFour-Wheel Drive on page 126.

301

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehiclefrom the rear:




4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle. Make sure the wheels are straightbefore towing.For manual transmission vehicles, make surethe wheels are straight before proceedingto the next steps. On automatic transmissionvehicles, use an adequate clamping deviceto ensure that the front wheels are locked intothe straight position.

302



Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehiclefrom the rear:




303

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle.For manual transmission vehicles, make surethe wheels are straight before proceedingto the next steps. On automatic transmissionvehicles, use an adequate clamping deviceto ensure that the front wheels are locked intothe straight position.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL can causeyour vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P) for anautomatic transmission, or if your vehicleis in gear, for a manual transmission.You or others could be injured. Make surethe parking brake is firmly set before youshift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.




After towing, see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL”under Four-Wheel Drive on page 126.

304

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe steps in this section. Ask your dealerfor advice and information about towing atrailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsthat would not be covered by your warranty.Always follow the instructions in this sectionand check with your dealer for more informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

305

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You may want to shift the transmission toTHIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gearselection if the transmission shifts too often(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions). If you have a manual transmissionand you are towing a trailer, it’s better notto use the highest gear.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

306

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pull a trailer are all important. It canalso depend on any special equipment thatyou have on your vehicle, and the amount of

tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” later in this section formore information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

The following charts show how much your trailer can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.

2WD Regular Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*Automatic Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 3,300 lbs (1 497 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,3.7L Engine 3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)

Manual Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 2,300 lbs (1 043 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

2WD Reg. Cab/mid-box Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*Automatic Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 3,200 lbs (1 451 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)


Manual Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 2,200 lbs (997 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

307

2WD Extended Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*Automatic Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)



2WD Crew Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*Automatic Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 2,900 lbs (1 315 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)



4WD Regular Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*Automatic Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)





308

4WD Extended Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*Automatic Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 2,900 lbs (1 315 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)





4WD Crew Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*Automatic Transmission,3.7L Engine 3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loadedvehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for yourvehicle should not be exceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at our CustomerAssistance Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 468 for more information.

309

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW because your vehiclewill be carrying that weight, too. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 290 for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,up to a maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weightcarrying hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch ball closestto the vehicle. This will help reduce the effectof trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.

310

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some of theitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability tocarry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce your trailering capacity morethan the total of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the frontaxle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg),a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and aGCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will begreater than just the weight itself, as much as1.5 times as much. The weight at the rearaxle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg)brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This isvery close to, but within the limit for RGAWRas well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

311

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits. Your maximumtrailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).

You may go further and think you must limittongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you muststill consider the effect on the rear axle.Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs(1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg)on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times theactual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongueweight is usually at least 10 percent of total loadedtrailer weight, you can expect that the largesttrailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs(2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

312

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification/Tire label located at thebottom of the center pillar on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle, or see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 290. Then be sure you don’t go over theGVWR limit for your vehicle, including the weightof the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch.

Weight-Distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying HitchesYou can use your step bumper hitch for trailersup to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and 200 lbs(90 kg) tongue weight.

Notice: If you use a step-bumper hitch, yourbumper could be damaged in sharp turns.Make sure you have ample room when turningto avoid contact between the trailer and thebumper.

313

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.For trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) you may attachthe safety chains to the attaching points on thebumper. For heavier trailers, follow the traileror hitch manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your rig. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes — andthey must be adequate. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

Your trailer’s brake system can tap into thevehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from yourvehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,both braking systems won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, then make thebrake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinderthat sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’tuse copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bendand finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.

314

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electrical connection atthe same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just movethat hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,move your hand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guide you.

315

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to haveextra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher.

The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even ifthe bulbs on the trailer are burned out.

Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeingyour signal when they are not. It’s important tocheck occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbsare still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphillgrades, consider the following: Engine coolant willboil at a lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn your engine off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,your vehicle may show signs similar to engineoverheating. To avoid this, let the engine run whileparked (preferably on level ground) with theautomatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the manualtransmission out of gear and the parking brakeapplied) for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If you do get the overheat warning,see Engine Overheating on page 348.

316

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manualtransmission. When parking uphill, turn yourwheels away from the curb. When parkingdownhill, turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift into PARK (P),or REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.See Parking Brake on page 130 for moreinformation.

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is in a drive gear and notin NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 126 for more information.

6. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:• start your engine,• shift into a gear, and• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

317

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 445 for more on this. Thingsthat are especially important in trailer operationare automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered in thismanual, and the Index will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good ideato review these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle may be equipped with a four-pintrailer towing harness. This harness has a four-pintrailer connector that is attached to a bracket onthe hitch platform. The four-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps

• White: Ground

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch load from the CWRfor your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with yourtrailer attached, so that you won’t go overthe GVWR or the GAWR.

You’ll get the best performance if you spread outthe weight of your load the right way, and ifyou choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Traileron page 305 later in this section.

318

Service ........................................................ 322Accessories and Modifications ................... 323California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 323Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 324Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 325Fuel ............................................................. 325

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 325Gasoline Specifications .............................. 325California Fuel ........................................... 326Additives ................................................... 326Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 327Filling the Tank ......................................... 328Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 330

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 330Hood Release ........................................... 331Engine Compartment Overview .................. 332Engine Oil ................................................. 333Engine Oil Life System .............................. 336

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 338Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 339Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 342Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 344Engine Coolant .......................................... 345Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 348Engine Overheating ................................... 348Cooling System ......................................... 350Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 355Power Steering Fluid ................................. 355Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 356Brakes ...................................................... 357Battery ...................................................... 361Jump Starting ............................................ 362

Rear Axle .................................................... 368Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 368Front Axle ................................................... 369

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

319

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 370Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 370Headlamps ................................................ 371Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime

Running Lamps (DRL) ........................... 372Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ................................ 372Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps ............................... 373License Plate Lamp ................................... 374Replacement Bulbs ................................... 374

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 375Tires ............................................................ 377

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 378Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 382Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 385

Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 386Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 391When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 393Buying New Tires ...................................... 394Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 396Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 397Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 398Wheel Replacement .................................. 398Tire Chains ............................................... 400If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 401Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 402Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 403Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 406Secondary Latch System ........................... 414Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 418Spare Tire ................................................. 422


320

Appearance Care ........................................ 424Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 424Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 425Leather ...................................................... 426Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 427Care of Safety Belts .................................. 427Weatherstrips ............................................ 427Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 428Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 428Finish Care ............................................... 428Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 429Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 430Tires ......................................................... 431Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 431

Finish Damage .......................................... 431Underbody Maintenance ............................ 432Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 432Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 433

Vehicle Identification .................................. 434Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 434Service Parts Identification Label ............... 434

Electrical System ........................................ 434Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 434Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 435Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 435Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 435

Capacities and Specifications .................... 439


321

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

322

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

323

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to serviceyour vehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 482.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 92.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 460.

324

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 326 for additional information.

325

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 190. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

326

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

327

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

328

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignitesit, you could be badly burned. Fuel canspray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. This spray can happen if yourtank is nearly full, and is more likely in hotweather. Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 428.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.

If the fuel cap is not properly installed, the FUELCAP message will appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and the check engine light will be lit onthe instrument panel cluster. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 and MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 190 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump orby notifying the station attendant. Leavethe area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 190.

329

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

330

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handlewith this symbolon it. It is locatedinside the vehicleon the lowerleft side of theinstrument panel.

2. Release the secondary latch on the hood.It is located below the front center ofthe hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop from its retainer andput the hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood propfrom the slot in the hood and return the prop toits retainer. Lower the hood 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and release it tolatch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closedand repeat the procedure if necessary.

331

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.9L engine (3.7L engine similar), you will see the following:

332

A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 356.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 345.

C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 338.

D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in enginecompartment). See Power Steering Fluidon page 355.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (IfEquipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 339.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 333.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling Systemon page 350.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). SeeJump Starting on page 362.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 333.

J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 362.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 357.

L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 435.

M. Battery. See Battery on page 361.N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).

See Hydraulic Clutch on page 344.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

333

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L),you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 439.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou are through.

334

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look or two things:• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

335

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL message willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year. However,your engine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has GM-trained peoplewho will perform this work using genuine GMparts and reset the system. It is also importantto check your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, youmust change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

336

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL messagebeing turned on, reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life system, do thefollowing:

1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON.

2. Press and release the stem in the lower centerof the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFEmessage is displayed.

3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESETmessages appear, press and hold the stemuntil several beeps sound. This confirmsthat the oil life system has been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL message comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 200.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose ofoil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.

337

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 332 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 445 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on andremove the cover.

2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 458to determine which filter to use.

4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover.Fasten the clips to hold the cover in place.

338

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check your automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 448, andbe sure to use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 455.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

339

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the enginetemperature gage moves and then remainssteady for 10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehiclehas been sitting for eight hours or more withthe engine off, but this is used only as a reference.Let the engine run at idle for five minutes ifoutside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If itis colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idlethe engine longer. Should the fluid level below during this cold check, you must check thefluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hotwill give you a more accurate reading of thefluid level.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutesor more.

340

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

1. Flip the handle up and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

The automatictransmission dipstickhandle with this symbolon it is located in theengine compartment onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 332 for more information on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. The fluid level must be inthe COLD area, below the cross-hatchedarea, for a cold check or in the HOT orcross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sureto keep the dipstick pointed down to getan accurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

341

How to Add AutomaticTransmission FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 455.

Add fluid only after checking the transmissionfluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only asa reference. If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check. It does not takemuch fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 455.• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as

described under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

• When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstick in place.

Manual Transmission Fluid

When to CheckA good time to have it checked is when theengine oil is changed. However, the fluid in yourmanual transmission does not require changing.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult,you may choose to have this done at yourGM dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false reading.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission to overheat. Besure to get an accurate reading if you checkyour transmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,the vehicle is parked on a level place and thetransmission is cool enough for you to rest yourfingers on the transmission case.

342

Then, follow these steps:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug andbe sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level islow, add more fluid as described in thenext steps.

How to Add FluidHere is how to add fluid. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 455.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add onlyenough fluid to bring the fluid level up tothe bottom of the filler plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug isfully seated.

343

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoiris filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.

The hydraulic clutchfluid reservoir cap hasthis symbol on it.See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 forreservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour clutch master cylinder reservoir and for theproper fluid. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 455.

344

How to Check and Add FluidThe proper fluid should be added if the level doesnot reach the bottom of the diaphragm when itis in place in the reservoir. See the instructions onthe reservoir cap.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 348.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

345

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and the proper coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use onlythe proper mixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 455 for more information.

346

Checking Coolant

The coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it.

It is located toward the rear of the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 332 for more information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should beat FULL COLD, or a little higher. When yourengine is warm, the level could be above theFULL COLD level.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator. Neverturn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

347

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but becareful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 350.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingA coolant temperature gage is on the instrumentpanel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 189.

The air conditioning might stop working if theengine is too hot. This is normal and helps coolthe engine.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.


348


If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catchfire. You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:• Climb a long hill on a hot day.• Stop after high-speed driving.• Idle for long periods in traffic.• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades”

under Towing a Trailer on page 305.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in

NEUTRAL while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL and let the engine idle.

2. Turn off the air conditioning.3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest

fan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, andpark your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the enginefor three minutes while you are parked. Push downthe accelerator until the engine speed is abouttwice as fast as normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while you are parked. If youstill have the warning, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but toget service help right away.

349

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Engine Cooling FanC. Radiator Pressure Cap

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or inthe radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

350

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engineagain. The engine cooling fan speed shouldincrease when idle speed is doubled by pushingthe accelerator pedal down. If it does not,your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner,at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

351

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 345for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. Add the proper mixturedirectly to the radiator, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before you do it.

352

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when thecooling system, including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise about one full turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap to remove it.

353

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 345for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL COLD mark.

5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck might be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure to secure it tightly.

354

Engine Fan NoiseThis vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins fasterto provide more air to cool the engine. In mosteveryday driving conditions, the clutch is notengaged. This improves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailertowing and/or high outside temperatures, thefan speed increases when the clutch engages.So you may hear an increase in fan noise.This is normal and should not be mistaken asthe transmission slipping or making extra shifts.It is merely the cooling system functioningproperly. The fan will slow down when additionalcooling is not required and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when youstart the engine. It will go away as the fan clutchdisengages.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is located nearthe front of the enginecompartment, behindthe radiator. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

355

How to Check Power Steering Fluid1. Turn the key off and let the engine

compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Then remove the cap again and look atthe fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be between the ADD and FULLmarks. If necessary, add only enough fluid tobring the level up to the proper range.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 455.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 332for reservoir location.

356

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze)in your windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The first is thatthe brake fluid goes down to an acceptable levelduring normal brake lining wear. When new liningsare put in, the fluid level goes back up. The otherreason is that fluid is leaking out of the brakesystem. If it is, you should have the brake systemfixed, since a leak means that sooner or later thebrakes will not work well, or will not work at all.

357

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking Brake Fluid” inthis section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 445.

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking offthe cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluidlevel should be aboveMIN. If it is not have thebrake system checkedto see if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but notover the MAX mark.

358

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 455.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap andthe area around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well,or they may not even work at all. Thiscould cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 428.

359

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drumbrakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbingnoise, have the rear brake linings inspectedimmediately. Also, the rear brake drums should beremoved and inspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing. When you havethe front brake pads replaced, have the rearbrakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

360

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, the brakesadjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example,when the brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get newapproved GM replacement parts.

If you do not, the brakes may no longer workproperly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between the front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in manyother ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 332 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

361

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 362 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

362

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

363

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on theother vehicle. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 332 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.



Be sure the batteries have enough water.You do not need to add water to theACDelco® battery (or batteries) installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery hasfiller caps, be sure the right amount offluid is there. If it is low, add water to takecare of that first. If you do not, explosivegas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

364

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

365

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) awayfrom the dead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connectionis just as good there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to the battery ismuch less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

366

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

367

Rear AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 mm to10 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the rear axle.

What to UseSee Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 455 to determine which kind of lubricantto use.

Four-Wheel DriveLubricant checks in this section apply to thisvehicle. There are two additional systems thatneed lubrication.

Transfer Case

When to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 448.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

368

A. Drain PlugB. Filler Plug

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the transfer case, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Remove the plug and add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 455.

Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check your frontaxle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

369

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant.

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricantto raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below thefiller plug hole.

When the differential is at operating temperature(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseSee Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 455 to determine what kind of lubricantto use.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 374.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

370

Headlamps

A. Low-Beam Headlamp/Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)

B. High-Beam Headlamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 331 for more information.

2. Reach in and access the bulb sockets frominside the engine compartment.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

4. Unplug the electrical connector from the oldbulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket.

5. Replace with a new bulb socket.

6. Plug in the electrical connector to the newbulb socket.

7. Reinstall the new bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly and turn it clockwiseto secure.

8. Close the hood.

371

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 331 for more information.

2. Reach in to access either one of the bulbsockets in the engine compartment.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove it from the lamp assembly.

4. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb torelease it from the bulb socket.

5. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.

6. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assemblyand turn it clockwise to secure.

7. Close the hood.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL)To replace the CHMSL bulb, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws and lift off the lampassembly from the vehicle.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove it from the lamp assembly.

3. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release itfrom the socket.

372


5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assemblyand turn it clockwise to secure.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten thescrews.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps

A. Stoplamp/TaillampB. Turn Signal/TaillampC. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 108for more information.

2. Remove the tworear lamp assemblyscrews near thetailgate latch.

3. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillamp assembly.

5. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb torelease it from the socket.


7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillampassembly and turn it clockwise to secure.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tightenthe screws.

9. Close the tailgate.

373

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulbsocket.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb socket out of the connector.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulbsocket.

4. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicksto secure it.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 912

License Plate Bulb W5W

Headlamps

High-beam 9005

Low-beam/DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL) 9006

Parking/Front Turn Signal 3757KA

Parking Lamp (Inboard) 3157A

Stoplamp, Rear Turn Signal,Taillamp, and Back-up Lamp 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

374

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 445 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 458.

Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touchthe windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiperarm until it locks into a vertical position.

A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab

D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivotlocking tab. Pull down on the blade assemblyto release it from the wiper arm hook.

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.The insert has two notches at one end that arelocked by bottom claws of the blade assembly.At the notched end, pull the insert from theblade assembly.

375

4. To install the new wiper insert, slide theinsert (D), notched end last, into the endwith two blade claws (A). Slide the insert allthe way through the blade claws at theopposite end (B). The plastic caps (C) will beforced off as the insert is fully inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by thebottom claws. Make sure that all other clawsare properly locked on both sides of theinsert slots.

A. Claw in NotchB. Correct InstallationC. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locksin the hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and bladeassembly onto the windshield.

376

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 290.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.



Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your vehicle’s tires are cold.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 385.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

377

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact sparetire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger Vehicle Tire Example

378

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 397.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See “Compact Spare Tire” under Spare Tireon page 422 for additional information.

Compact Spare Tire Example

379

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN):The Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TINshows the manufacturer and plant code, tiresize, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire,although only one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to supportthat load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 385.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

380

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system. The letter P as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by theU.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70,as shown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 70 percent as high as itis wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

381

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 385.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 290.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating forthe front axle. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 290.

382

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 290.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 290.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 385 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 290.

383

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 393.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 397.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 290.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 290.

384

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), belowthe driver’s door latch. This label shows yourvehicle’s original equipment tires and the correctinflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 290. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort, never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire.If you have a compact spare tire, it should be at60 psi (420 kPa). See Spare Tire on page 422for additional information.

385

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare underinflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressure levels. TPMSsensors are mounted onto each tire and wheelassembly on your vehicle, except the spare tire.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressurein your vehicle’s tires and transmit the tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning light located in the instrument panelcluster, and at the same time display the LOWTIRE warning message on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The low tire pressure warninglight and the LOW TIRE warning message appearat each ignition cycle until the tires are inflatedto the correct inflation pressure.

386

For additional information and details about theDIC operation and displays see DIC Controls andDisplays on page 196 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 200.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the low tire pressure warning light and theDIC LOW TIRE message may come on when thevehicle is first started, and then turn off as youstart to drive. This may be an early indicator thatthe air pressure in the tire(s) is getting lowand needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

387

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the systemis not operating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately one minuteand then remain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 290, for anexample of the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on your vehicle. Also seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 385 for additionalinformation.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 391, When It Is Time forNew Tires on page 393, and Tires on page 377.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehiclehas Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealantcan damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.

388

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle’s tires,the identification codes will need to be matchedto the new tire/wheel position. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’sside front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, anddriver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have one minute to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall, tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan one minute, to match the first tire andwheel, or more than five minutes to match allfour tire and wheel positions the matching processstops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching procedure isoutlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with theengine off.

3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from AUTOto OFF four times within three seconds.A double horn chirp will sound and theTPMS low tire warning light starts flashing.The double horn chirp and flashing TPMSwarning light indicates the TPMS matchingprocess has started. The TPMS warning lightshould continue flashing throughout thematching procedure. The LOW TIREmessage displays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

389

5. Remove the valve cap from the valvecap stem. Activate the TPMS sensor byincreasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressurefor 10 seconds, then stop and listen for asingle horn chirp. The single horn chirp shouldsound within 15 seconds, confirming thatthe sensor identification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheel position.If you do not hear the confirming singlehorn chirp, turn the ignition switch to LOCKand start over beginning with Step 2. Tolet air-pressure out of a tire you can use thepointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-styleair pressure gage, or a key.

6. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp forthe driver side rear tire, check to see if theTPMS low tire warning light and the DIC LOWTIRE messages have turned off. If yes, theTPMS sensors have been relearned. Turnthe ignition switch to LOCK.If the low tire warning light and the DIC SERVTPM messages are on after completingStep 5 for the driver side rear tire, the sensorrelearn process has not been successful.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK and repeatthe matching process beginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to the recommendedair pressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

390

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complieswith RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 393and Wheel Replacement on page 398 formore information.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 402.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important, seeScheduled Maintenance on page 445.

391

When rotating your tires, always use one of thecorrect rotation patterns shown here.

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a sparetire that does not match your vehicle’s road tiresand wheels, in size and type, do not includethe spare in the tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. For the locationof the Tire and Loading Information label seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 290. Make certainthat all wheel nuts are properly tightened, see“Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 439 for the proper wheelnut torque specification.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 402.

Any time you rotate the vehicle’s tires the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS) will need to bereset. The TPMS identification codes will needto be matched to the tire and wheel position. See“TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” under TirePressure Monitor System on page 386.

392

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tiresmay not have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

393

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.

If the tires have an all-season tread design, theTPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 378 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle while driving.If you mix tires of different sizes, brands,or types (radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types may alsocause damage to your vehicle. Be sureto use the correct size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.


394


Your vehicle may have a compact sparetire and wheel assembly. If the vehiclehas a compact spare tire and wheel,they have the same overall diameter asyour vehicle’s full-size tires and wheels.Because they were designed anddeveloped for use on your vehicle, it isall right to drive your vehicle with thecompact spare installed properly.Compact spare tires are designed fortemporary use only. See Spare Tireon page 422.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 290,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

395

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a differentsize than your original equipment wheels andtires, this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance torollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, tractioncontrol, and electronic stability control, theperformance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 394 andAccessories and Modifications on page 323for additional information.

396

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

397

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at the factory togive you the longest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling to one side or the other,the alignment may need to be checked. If younotice your vehicle vibrating when driving ona smooth road, your tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

398

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them onlywith new GM original equipment parts. Thisway, you will be sure to have the right wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 402 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

399

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/75R15, P265/75R15, P235/75R15, or P235/50R18 sizetires, do not use tire chains. They candamage your vehicle because there is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle parts. Thearea damaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of your vehicleand you or others may be injured in acrash. Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.



Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust, or remove the deviceif it is contacting your vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install themon the rear tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size otherthan P225/75R15, P265/75R15, P235/75R15 orP235/50R18 use tire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use chains that are theproper size for your tires. Install them on thetires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on thetires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow down untilit stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage your vehicle.

400

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

401

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 160 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transmissionshift lever in PARK (P), or shift amanual transmission to FIRST (1)or REVERSE (R).



3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

5. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be the tireon the other side, at the opposite end ofthe vehicle.

402

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use thefollowing example as a guide to assist you inthe placement of the wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe tools you will need are located under thepassenger’s seat.

For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocksare located under the driver’s side rear seat.

For regular andextended cab vehicles,the jack and wheelblocks are locatedunder the cover at thecenter of the vehiclebehind the front seats.

Crew Cab

Regular/Extended Cab

403

To access the tools, do the following:

1. Move the seatsforward to accessthe cover.

2. Turn the wing nut on the covercounterclockwise to remove it.For crew cab models, reach under the rearseat to access the jack and wheel blocks.To reinstall the jack and wheel block assemblyin the mounting bracket, insert the tabs intothe jack base by pushing the blocks up intothe assembly. The outer hole in the jack basealigns with the tab on the bracket. Whenreinstalling, make sure the jack is secure, butdo not overtighten the jack in the bracket.

3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer by turning the wing nutcounterclockwise.

4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear ofthe tire farthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

5. Locate the wing nut used to retain the storagebag and tools which is under the frontpassenger’s seat. Remove it by turning thewing nut counterclockwise.

You will use the jack handle extensions and thewheel wrench to remove the underbody-mountedspare tire.

Extended/Regular Cab

404

A. Jack HandleExtensions

B. Jack

C. Extension ToolD. Wheel WrenchE. Wheel Blocks

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D) and the jackhandle extensions (A).

2. Insert the hoist end (chiseled end) of theextension tool (C) through the hole in therear bumper and into the funnel-shaped guide.The chiseled end of the extension is usedto lower the spare tire.

405

3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwiseto lower the spare tire to the ground. Continueto turn the wheel wrench until the spare tirecan be pulled out from under the vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,the secondary latch is engaged causingthe tire not to lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 414.

4. Tilt the retainerwhen the tire hasbeen lowered,and slide it up thecable so it canbe pulled up throughthe wheel opening.

5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireUse the following pictures and instructions as aguide in removing the flat tire and raising the vehicle.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A),the wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C),the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheelwrench (E).

406

1. Remove the center cap by placing the chiselend of the wheel wrench (E) into one of theslots on the wheel and gently prying thecap out.If your vehicle has the Xtreme package,remove each wheel nut cap with the wheelwrench and remove the center cap by hand.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts by turning it counterclockwise. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

407

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

3. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle asshown for the front or rear locations.

Front Position

408

If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle,position the jack to the rear of the front tirein the pocket off of the frame.

If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jackunder the rear axle and get as close aspossible to the shock absorber.

4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so thatthe rear axle is resting securely between thegrooves that are on the jack head.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough room for the sparetire to fit under the wheel well.

Front Position Rear Position

409

6. Remove all thewheel nuts andtake off theflat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, can makethe wheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.



In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed,to get all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rustor dirt from thewheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

8. Install the spare tire.

410

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

9. Put the wheel nutsback on with therounded end of thenuts toward thewheel. Tighteneach wheel nut byhand. Then usethe wheel wrenchto tighten thenuts until thewheel is heldagainst the hub.

Front Position

411

10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 439for wheel nut torque specification.

Rear Position

412

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 439for the wheel nut torque specification.

11. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown byturning the wheelwrench clockwise.

When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire,you must also reinstall the center cap. Place thecap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seatsflush with the wheel. The cap only goes on oneway. Be sure to line up the tab on the center capwith the indentation on the wheel.

For the Xtreme, tighten each nut cap by hand,then tighten an additional one quarter of a turnwith the wheel wrench.

413

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly that has a secondary latch system. Itis designed to stop the spare tire from suddenlyfalling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch towork, the spare must be installed with the valvestem pointing down. See Storing a Flat orSpare Tire and Tools on page 418.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Check under thevehicle to see if thecable end fittingis visible.

2. If the cable end fitting is not visible, proceedto Step 6.If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the wheel wrench clockwise untilyou hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten the cable.

414

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.If the spare tire lowers to the ground,continue with Step 5 under Removing theSpare Tire and Tools on page 403.

5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cableis exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortestends, with the backs facing each other.

7. Place the bottomedge of the jack (A)on the wheelblocks (B),separating themso that the jack isbalanced securely.

415

8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheelwrench to the jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicle towards thefront of the rear bumper. Position the center liftpoint of the jack under the wheel.

9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the tire.

10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stopsmoving upward and is held firmly in place,the secondary latch has released, and thetire is balancing on the jack.

11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoistend of the extension through the hole in therear bumper.Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise oneturn or until the wheel retainer assembly isdisengaged.

12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack.Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

416

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the under spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack. Use one hand topush against the spare while firmly pulling thejack out from under the spare tire with theother hand.If the spare tire is hanging from the cable,insert the hoist end of the extension intothe hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turnthe wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare the rest of the way.

14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cableand pull it through the wheel opening.Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turnthe wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable.Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare orflat tire using the hoist assembly until it hasbeen replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 406.

417

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time or with the valve stem pointingup may damage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stem pointing downand have the wheel/tire repaired as soonas possible.

Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in thespare tire carrier. Use the following art andtext to help you.

1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of thevehicle with the valve stem pointed down.

2. Tilt the retainer downward and through thewheel opening. Make sure the retainer isfully seated across the underside of the wheel.

418

3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensionstogether as shown.

4. Insert the hoist end of the extension throughthe hole in the rear bumper and into thefunnel-shaped guide.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raisethe tire part way up. Make sure the retaineris seated in the wheel opening and thevalve stem is pointed down.

6. Raise the tire fully against the undersideof the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

419

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely.Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire.If the tire moves, check to make sure thetire valve stem is pointing down, then usethe wheel wrench to loosen and then tightenthe cable.

To store the tools, do the following:

1. Return the wheel wrench, jack extensions andthe storage bag to the locations describedunder Removing the Spare Tire and Toolson page 403.

2. Install the wheel blocks first. Then installthe jack.

3. Secure the items in the vehicle asshown next.

420

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Wing Nut

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Wing Nut

Crew Cab

Regular/Extended Cab

421

Spare Tire

Compact Spare TireYour vehicle may have a compact spare tire.Although the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airover time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand the compact spare tire is installed on yourvehicle, do not drive in four-wheel drive untilyou can have your flat tire repaired and/orreplaced. You could damage your vehicle, andthe repair costs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never use four-wheel drive when thecompact spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure your vehicle’s spare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made to perform well atspeeds up to 62 mph (100 km/h) for distancesup to 500 miles (804 km). For heavy payloads ortowing, and for low traction or four-wheel-driveconditions, repair or replace the full-size tire.

Of course, it is best to replace your vehicle’s sparewith a full-size tire as soon as you can. The sparetire will last longer and be in good shape in caseyou need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

422

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle may have a full-size spare tire,which, when new, was fully inflated. A spare tiremay lose air over time, so check its inflationpressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 385 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 290 for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle. For instructionon how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, seeRemoving the Flat Tire and Installing the SpareTire on page 406 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools on page 418.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tirethan the road tires originally installed on yourvehicle. This spare was developed for use onyour vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If yourvehicle has four-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep the vehiclein two-wheel drive.

Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand the different size spare tire is installedon your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have your flat tire repairedand/or replaced. You could damage yourvehicle, and the repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when the different sizespare tire is installed on your vehicle.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare is correctly inflated. The spare tire is madeto perform well at speeds up to 62 mph (100 km/h)for distances up to 500 miles (804 km). For heavypayloads or towing, and for low traction orfour-wheel-drive conditions, repair or replace thefull-size tire. Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle. This way, thespare tire will be available in case you need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,because they will not fit. Keep your spare tireand its wheel together.

423

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result

from using cleaners on surfaces for which theywere not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

424

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp objectto remove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interiorand does not improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attractsdirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholsterywhile cleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

425

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area untilthe cleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never usesteam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters orspot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leatherand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

426

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened witha mild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your interior andare not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase glosson your instrument panel. The increase ingloss may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to seethrough the windshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent applicationmay be required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 455.

427

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays ofthe sun. Use a car washing soap. Do notuse strong soaps or chemical detergents. Besure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 433. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and notallowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois oran all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 428.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 433.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

428

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

429

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damagethe surface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlyGM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damagethe surface of these wheels.

430

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.

431

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do thisfor you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutantscan fall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

432

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removesspots and stains fromcarpets, vinyl, andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

433

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You cansee it if you look through the windshield fromoutside your vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Certification/Tire and Service Parts labelsand the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:• VIN• Model designation• Paint information• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.Your vehicle has an air bag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 92.

434

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that hasthe same amperage. Just pick some feature ofyour vehicle that you can get along without — likethe radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soonas you can.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The engine compartment fuse block is locatedon the driver’s side of the engine compartment.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332for more information on location.

To remove the cover, push in on the tab on theend of the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover,line up the tab and push down on the cover untilthe tab clicks into place.

435

Fuses UsageDRL Daylight Running LampsAUX PWR 1 Accessory Power 1STOP Brake Switch, StoplampsBLWR Climate Control FanS/ROOF Sunroof (If Equipped)

Fuses Usage

A/C Air Conditioning Control Head,Power Seats

PWR/SEAT Power Seat Circuit Breaker(If Equipped)

RT HDLP Passenger’s Side Headlamp

436

Fuses UsageLT HDLP Driver’s Side HeadlampAUX PWR 2 Accessory Power 2FOG/LAMP Fog Lamps (If Equipped)A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorWSW Wiper/Washer SwitchRVC Regulated Voltage ControlPWR/WNDW Power Windows (If Equipped)FUEL/PUMP Fuel PumpSTRTR Starter Solenoid RelayWPR Wiper

ABS 2 Anti-lock Brake System 2(ABS Pump)

DR/LCK Power Door Locks (If Equipped)ETC Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

02 SNSR Oxygen Sensors, Air InjectionReactor (AIR) Relay

CRUISE

Cruise Control Switch, InsideRearview Mirror, Transfer CaseControl Module, Brake Switch,Clutch Disable

HTD/SEAT Heated Seat (If Equipped)

AIRBAGSupplemental Inflatable RestraintSystem, Sensing and DiagnosticModule

Fuses Usage

ABSAnti-lock Brake System (ABS),ABS module, Four-Wheel Drive,Gravity Sensor

BCK/UP Back-up LightsFRT/AXLE Front Axle ActuatorTRN/HAZRDREAR Rear Turn/Hazard Lights

ERLSMass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor,Can Purge Solenoid, Air InjectionReactor (AIR) Relay

PCMI Powertrain Control Module (PCM)TRANS Transmission Solenoid

IGN

Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch,Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,Ignition Coils 1-5, Air ConditioningRelay

INJ Injectors

ABS 1 Anti-lock Brake System 1(ABS Logic)

FRT PRKLAMP

Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driverand Passenger’s Side PowerWindow Switches Lighting

REAR PRKLAMP

Rear Parking Lamp 1,Passenger’s Side Taillamp,License Plate Lamps

437

Fuses Usage

REAR PRKLAMP 2

Driver’s Side Rear Taillamp,Passenger Side Airbag IndicatorLighting, Instrument Panel DimmingPower (2WD/4WD switch lighting)

CLSTR ClusterTRN/HAZRDFRT

Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo Lamps/Mirrors

TCCM Transfer Case Control ModuleHORN HornTBC Truck Body ControllerIGN TRNSD Ignition TransducersRDO RadioONSTAR OnStar®

CNSTR VENT Fuel Canister Vent SolenoidPCM B Powertrain Control Module (PCM) B

Relays UsageDRL Daylight Running LampsBEAM SEL Beam Selection

IGN 3 HVACIgnition 3, Climate Control,Climate Control Head Fuse,Power Seat Fuse

RAP

Retained Accessory Power(Power Window Fuse,Wiper/Washer Switch Fuse),Sunroof Fuse

Relays Usage

PRK/LAMP Front Parking Lamp Fuse,Rear Parking Lamps

HDLP HeadlampsFOG/LAMP Fog Lamps (If Equipped)FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump FuseA/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

RUN/CRNK

Run/Crank, Airbag System Fuse,Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse,Front Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse,Transmission Fuse, ERLS

PWR/TRN Powertrain, Electronic ThrottleControl Fuse, Oxygen Sensor Fuse

HORN HornWPR 2 Wiper 2 (High/Low)WPR Wipers (On/Off)STRTR Starter Relay (PCM Relay)

Miscellaneous UsageWPR Diode — WiperA/C CLTCH Diode — Air Conditioning, ClutchMEGA FUSE Mega Fuse

438

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 455 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerantcharge amount, see the refrigerant caution

label located under the hood. See your dealerfor more information.

Cooling System

2.9L Engine 10.4 qt 9.8 L

3.7L Engine 10.6 qt 10.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter



Fuel Tank 19.5 gal 76 L

439

Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Transmission (Drain and Refill)

Automatic 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Manual – Two-Wheel Drive 2.3 qt 2.2 L

Manual – Four-Wheel Drive 2.4 qt 2.3 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsType VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.9L 9 AutomaticManual 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

3.7L E Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

440

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 442Introduction ............................................... 442Maintenance Requirements ........................ 442Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 442Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 443Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 445Additional Required Services ..................... 448Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 449

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 451At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 451At Least Once a Month ............................. 452At Least Once a Year ............................... 452Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 455Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 458Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 459Maintenance Record .................................. 460

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

441

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?The Plan supplements your new vehiclewarranties. See your Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance may not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tireinflation can increase the level of emissions fromyour vehicle. To help protect our environment, andto keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure tomaintain your vehicle properly.

442

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do notknow exactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week. Oryou may drive long distances all the time in veryhot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle inmaking deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 290.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving on page 260.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 325.

443

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 445 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 448 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 449 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 324.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 482.

Owner Checks and Services on page 451 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 455 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 458.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

444

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL message comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 200. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if youare driving under the best conditions, the engine oillife system may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer has GM-trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 336 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL message appears, certainservices, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.

445

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 333. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 336. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 338. See footnote (j). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 391 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 452.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

446

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transmission and transfer case fluid levels and add fluid as needed. •

447

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 338. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

448

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (k).

•

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoesfor wear or cracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parkingbrake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspensionand steering system for damaged, loose, ormissing parts or signs of wear. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for proper hook-up,

binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually checkconstant velocity joints, rubber boots, and axleseals for leaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuineGM parts as needed. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap and cleaning the outside of theradiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

449

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also lookfor any opened or broken airbag coverings, andhave them repaired or replaced. The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door andfuel door hinges, latches and locks (including glovebox and console doors), hood latch assembly,secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, releasepawl, and any moving seat hardware. Lubricatehood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot andtailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivot points,and hinges. More frequent lubrication may berequired when exposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 345 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

450

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 455.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 333 for furtherdetails.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 345 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

451

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 385. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 402.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 391.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 130.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

452

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine. Thevehicle should start only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way to the floor. If thevehicle starts when the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down, contact your GMGoodwrench® dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 130.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, butdo not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), contact your GMGoodwrench® dealer for service.

453

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transmission, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transmission, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

454

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mudand other debris can collect.

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 333.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 345.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

455


Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806, inCanada 89021807).

Hydraulic ClutchSystem

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347, inCanada 10953517) or equivalentDOT-3 brake fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Front andRear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Transfer CaseSynchromesh Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12345349, inCanada 10953465).

Rear DrivelineCenter Splineand Universal

Joints


ConstantVelocity

Universal Joint


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

456


Hood and DoorHinges, BodyDoor Hinge

Pins, LiftgateHinge andLinkage,

Folding Seats,and Fuel

Door Hinge


Outer TailgateHandle PivotPoints and

Hinges



WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

457

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15202408 A1624C

Engine Oil Filter

2.9L Engine 88984215 PF46

3.7L Engine 89017342 PF61

Spark Plugs 12598004 41-103

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm) 88958226 —

Passenger’s Side — 19 inches (48 cm) 88958228 —

458

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.9L and 3.7L Engines with air

2.9L and 3.7L Engine without air

459

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 442.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 451 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

460

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



461

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



462

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 464Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 464Online Owner Center ................................. 467Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 468Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 468GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 469Roadside Assistance Program ................... 470Courtesy Transportation ............................. 473Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 476Collision Damage Repair ........................... 477

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 481Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 481Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 481Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 481Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 482

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

463

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s salesor service departments. Sometimes, however,despite the best intentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If your concern hasnot been resolved to your satisfaction, the followingsteps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

464

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the BBB AutoLine Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicleage, mileage, and other factors. General Motorsreserves the right to change eligibility limitationsand/or discontinue its participation in this program.

465

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In theevent that you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of its participation in ano-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved by animpartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaint tothe final decision, should be completed in about70 days. We believe our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibilityin the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

466

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

467

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, theletter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

468

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

469

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres in Canada).Service to provide diesel may be restricted. Forsafety reasons, propane and other alternativefuels will not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

470

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest dealershipfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired insand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlightingyour choice of either the most direct routeor the most scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

471

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while on route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of $500(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:• Your name, home address, and home

telephone number.• Telephone number of your location.• Location of the vehicle.• Model, year, color, and license plate number.• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion to useour service, it is added security while traveling foryou and your family. Remember, we are only aphone call away. U.S. customers call ChevroletRoadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers call1-800-268-6800.

472

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program fornew vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

473

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed whileyou wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GMhelps to minimize your inconvenience by providingseveral transportation options. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offer you one of thefollowing:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participating dealerscan provide you with shuttle service to get you toyour destination with minimal interruption of yourdaily schedule. This includes one-way or round tripshuttle service within reasonable time and distanceparameters for the dealer’s area.

474

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rentalvehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for anovernight warranty repair. Rental reimbursementwill be limited and must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you sign and completea rental agreement and meet state/provincial,local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.

Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usage charges andmay also be responsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to theterms and conditions described herein at itssole discretion.

475

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditionsfor airbag deployment and, if the vehicle has theAnti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provide anti-lockbraking and to help the driver control the vehicle indifficult driving situations. Some information may bestored during regular operations to facilitate repairof detected malfunctions; other information is storedonly in a crash event by computer systems, suchas those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed,safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision.

This information has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles and drivingsafety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do not recordsounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with the consent ofthe lessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or

• as required by law.

476

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can readthe information if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale value,and safety performance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintainyour GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.

477

A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained techniciansand state of the art equipment, or be able torecommend a collision repair center that hasGM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switching toanother insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of your lease for poor qualityrepairs.

478

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 470 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are drivable.

479

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insist on Genuine GMparts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you maybe obligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’scollision policy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company. In such cases,you can have control of the repair and parts choicesas long as cost stays within reasonable limits.

480

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

481

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motorscars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis and service of yourvehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin referencenumber can be obtained by contactingyour General Motors dealer or by calling1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). Thisreference number is needed to order the servicebulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

482

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.


Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.


Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

483

✍ NOTES

484

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 323Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 174Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-

Equipped Vehicle ....................................... 93Additives, Fuel ............................................ 326Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 434Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 338Air Conditioning ........................................... 176Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 184Readiness Light ....................................... 183

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 476

Airbag System ............................................... 76Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 93How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 84Passenger Sensing System ....................... 86Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 92What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 84What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 85

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 82Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 79

AM-FM Radio .............................................. 207Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 244Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 244Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 251Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 188Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 430Care of Safety Belts ................................ 427Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 432Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 428Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 424Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 425Finish Care .............................................. 428Finish Damage ......................................... 431Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 427Leather .................................................... 426Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 431Tires ........................................................ 431

485

Appearance Care (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 432Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 433Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 428Weatherstrips ........................................... 427Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 429

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 175Assist Handles ............................................ 151Audio System(s) .......................................... 205

AM-FM Radio .......................................... 207Care of Your CD Player ........................... 243Care of Your CDs .................................... 243Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 244Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 244Radio with CD ......................................... 210Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 221Setting the Time for Radios with

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 207Setting the Time for Radios without

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 206Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 242Understanding Radio Reception ............... 242XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 244

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 170Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 339Operation ................................................. 120

BBattery ........................................................ 361

Electric Power Management ..................... 173Run-Down Protection ............................... 174

Battery Warning Light .................................. 186Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 280Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 251Emergencies ............................................ 253Parking .................................................... 130System Warning Light .............................. 187

Brakes ........................................................ 357Braking ....................................................... 250Braking in Emergencies ............................... 253Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 115

486

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 370Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 372Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Daytime Running Lamps ....................... 372Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 370Headlamps ............................................... 371License Plate Lamps ................................ 374Replacement Bulbs .................................. 374Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps .............................. 373Buying New Tires ........................................ 394

CCalibration .......................................... 139, 142California Fuel ............................................. 326California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 323Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 439Carbon Monoxide .............. 108, 136, 284, 305Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 427Your CD Player ........................................ 243Your CDs ................................................. 243

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 234Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 372Chains, Tire ................................................. 400Check

Engine Light ............................................ 190Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 330Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 432Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 46Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 56Older Children ........................................... 43Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 68Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..................... 71Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 71Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 53

Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 244Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 175

487

CleaningAluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 430Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 428Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 425Finish Care .............................................. 428Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 424Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 427Leather .................................................... 426Tires ........................................................ 431Underbody Maintenance ........................... 432Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 428Weatherstrips ........................................... 427Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 429

Climate Control System ............................... 176Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 178

Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 344Collision Damage Repair ............................. 477Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compass ............................................ 139, 142Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 113Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 250

CoolantEngine Temperature Gage ........................ 189Heater, Engine ......................................... 119

Cooling System ........................................... 350Cruise Control ............................................. 164Cruise Control Light .................................... 194Cupholder(s) ................................................ 150Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 473Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 468Customer Assistance Offices .................... 468Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 464GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 469Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................. 481Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 481Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 481Roadside Assistance Program .................. 470Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 482

488

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 170Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ....... 195Defensive Driving ........................................ 246Disc, MP3 ................................................... 234Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 324Dome Lamp ................................................ 173Dome Lamp Override .................................. 173Door

Locks ....................................................... 104Power Door Locks ................................... 105Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 106Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 106Rear Doors .............................................. 107

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 25

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 196DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 196DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 274City .......................................................... 278Defensive ................................................. 246

Driving (cont.)Drunken ................................................... 247Freeway ................................................... 279Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 282In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 275Off-Road .................................................. 260Recovery Hooks ....................................... 289Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 288Winter ...................................................... 284

EElectric Power Management ........................ 173Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 434Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 435Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 435Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 435

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 338Battery ..................................................... 361Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 190Coolant .................................................... 345Coolant Heater ......................................... 119

489

Engine (cont.)Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 189Drive Belt Routing .................................... 459Engine Compartment Overview ................ 332Exhaust ................................................... 136Fan Noise ................................................ 355Oil ........................................................... 333Oil Life System ........................................ 336Overheating ............................................. 348Starting .................................................... 118

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 476Exit Lighting ................................................ 173Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 42Exterior Cargo Lamps ................................. 172Exterior Lamps ............................................ 168

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 338Finish Damage ............................................ 431Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 244Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 160Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 163Flat Tire ...................................................... 401

Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 402Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 418Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 339Manual Transmission ................................ 342Power Steering ........................................ 355Windshield Washer .................................. 356

Fog Lamps .................................................. 171Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 126, 368Front Armrest Storage Area ......................... 151Front Axle ................................................... 369Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime

Running Lamps ........................................ 372Fuel ............................................................ 325

Additives .................................................. 326California Fuel .......................................... 326Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 330Filling Your Tank ...................................... 328Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 327Gage ....................................................... 195Gasoline Octane ...................................... 325Gasoline Specifications ............................ 325

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 435Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 435Windshield Wiper ..................................... 435

490

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 189Fuel ......................................................... 195Speedometer ........................................... 181Tachometer .............................................. 181

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 325Specifications ........................................... 325

Glove Box ................................................... 150GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 469

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 160Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamps .................................................. 371

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 170Bulb Replacement .................................... 370Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 170Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 163Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 370High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 163On Reminder ........................................... 169

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 176Highbeam On Light ..................................... 194Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 281Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 282Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 330Release ................................................... 331

Horn ............................................................ 160How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 344

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 116Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 385Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 158Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 172Cluster ..................................................... 180

Interior Lamps ............................................. 172

491

JJump Starting .............................................. 362

KKeyless Entry System ................................. 101Keys ............................................................. 99

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 378Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 174Dome ....................................................... 173Dome Lamp Override ............................... 173Electric Power Management ..................... 173Exterior .................................................... 168Exterior Cargo .......................................... 172Fog .......................................................... 171Interior ..................................................... 172

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 56

Latches, Seatback ......................................... 16License Plate Lamps ................................... 374Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 183Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 188Battery Warning ....................................... 186Brake System Warning ............................. 187Cruise Control .......................................... 194Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 195Highbeam On .......................................... 194Malfunction Indicator ................................ 190Oil Pressure ............................................. 193Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 184Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 182Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 182Security ................................................... 194Tire Pressure ........................................... 189Up-Shift ................................................... 187

492

LightingExit .......................................................... 173

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 254Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 290Lockout Protection ....................................... 107Locks

Door ........................................................ 104Lockout Protection ................................... 107Power Door ............................................. 105Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 106Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 106

Loss of Control ........................................... 259Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 10Power Controls .......................................... 11

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 448At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 451At Least Once a Month ............................ 452

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)At Least Once a Year .............................. 452Introduction .............................................. 442Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 449Maintenance Record ................................ 460Maintenance Requirements ...................... 442Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 458Owner Checks and Services .................... 451Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 455Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 445Using ....................................................... 443Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 442

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 190Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10Manual Seats .................................................. 9Manual Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 342Operation ................................................. 124

Manual Windows ......................................... 110Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200

493

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview with

Compass and Temperature Display ....... 142Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................. 139

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 138Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 138Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 146Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 145Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 145

MP3 ............................................................ 234MyGMLink.com ............................................ 467

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 115Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 458

OOdometer .................................................... 181Odometer, Trip ............................................ 181Off-Road Driving .......................................... 260Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 257

OilEngine ..................................................... 333Pressure Light .......................................... 193

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 336Older Children, Restraints ............................. 43Online Owner Center ................................... 467OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 147Other Warning Devices ................................ 160Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 178Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 174Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 146Manual Mirrors ......................................... 145Power Mirrors .......................................... 145

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 451Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 431Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 132Shifting Out of ......................................... 134

494

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 130Over Things That Burn ............................ 135

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 134Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 184Passenger Sensing System ........................... 86Passing ....................................................... 257Passlock® .................................................... 114Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .............. 296Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 174Door Locks .............................................. 105Lumbar Controls ........................................ 11Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 117Seat .......................................................... 10Steering Fluid .......................................... 355Windows .................................................. 111

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 42Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 106

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 24

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 348Radios ........................................................ 205

AM-FM Radio .......................................... 207Care of Your CD Player ........................... 243Care of Your CDs .................................... 243Radio with CD ......................................... 210Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 221Setting the Time for Radios with

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 207Setting the Time for Radios without

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 206Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 242Understanding Reception ......................... 242

Rear Axle .................................................... 368Limited-Slip .............................................. 254

Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 106Rear Doors ................................................. 107Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Operation .............................. 17, 18Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36Rear Storage Area ...................................... 151Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass and Temperature Display .......... 142

495

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withOnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ..................................................... 139

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 138Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 138Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 455Recovery Hooks .......................................... 289Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 297Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 101Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................. 102Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 406Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 403Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 374Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 481General Motors ........................................ 481United States Government ....................... 481

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 94Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 95

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 117Right Front Passenger Position, Safety

Belts .......................................................... 34Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 470Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 288Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 459Running the Engine While Parked ............... 137

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 182Pretensioners ............................................. 42Reminder Light ........................................ 182

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 427Center Front Passenger Position ................ 35Driver Position ........................................... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36

496

Safety Belts (cont.)Right Front Passenger Position .................. 34Safety Belt Extender .................................. 42Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 34Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 33

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 445Seatback Latches .......................................... 16Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual ........................................................ 9Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10Power Lumbar ........................................... 11Power Seats .............................................. 10Rear Seat Operation ........................... 17, 18Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12Seatback Latches ...................................... 16

Secondary Latch System ............................. 414Securing a Child Restraint

Center Front Seat Position ......................... 71Rear Seat Position ..................................... 68Right Front Seat Position ........................... 71

Security Light .............................................. 194Service ........................................................ 322

Accessories and Modifications .................. 323Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 325California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 323Doing Your Own Work ............................. 324Engine Soon Light ................................... 190Publications Ordering Information ............. 482

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 92Setting the Time

Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 207Radios without Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 206Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 431Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 132Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 134Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 33Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 162Sliding Rear Windows ................................. 112Spare Tire ................................................... 422

Installing .................................................. 406Removing ................................................ 403Storing ..................................................... 418

497

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 439Speedometer ............................................... 181Starting Your Engine ................................... 118Steering ...................................................... 255Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 161Storage Areas

Cupholder(s) ............................................ 150Front Armrest Storage Area ...................... 151Glove Box ................................................ 150Rear Storage Area ................................... 151

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 288Sun Visors .................................................. 112Sunroof ....................................................... 153

TTachometer ................................................. 181Tailgate ....................................................... 108Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-upLamps .................................................. 373

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 242Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 112

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 113Passlock® ................................................ 114

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 161Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 189Tires ........................................................... 377

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 430

Buying New Tires ..................................... 394Chains ..................................................... 400Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 402Cleaning .................................................. 431Different Size ........................................... 396If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 401Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 385Inspection and Rotation ............................ 391Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 406Pressure Monitor System ......................... 386Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 406Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 403Secondary Latch System ......................... 414Spare Tire ................................................ 422Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 418Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 378Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 382Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 397Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 398

498

Tires (cont.)Wheel Replacement ................................. 398When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 393

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 297Towing a Trailer ....................................... 305Your Vehicle ............................................. 297

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 253Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 254

TrailerRecommendations .................................... 318

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 339Fluid, Manual ........................................... 342Up-Shift Light ........................................... 187

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 120Transmission Operation, Manual .................. 124Trip Odometer ............................................. 181Truck-Camper Loading Information .............. 296Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 162Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 161

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 242Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 397Up-Shift Light .............................................. 187

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 250Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 290Parking Your ............................................ 134Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 476

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 434Service Parts Identification Label .............. 434

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 178Visors .......................................................... 112

499

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 179Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 160Other Warning Devices ............................ 160Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 398Different Size ........................................... 396Replacement ............................................ 398

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 53Windows ..................................................... 110

Manual ..................................................... 110Power ...................................................... 111Sliding Rear ............................................. 112

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 164Washer Fluid ........................................... 356Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 375Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 429Wiper Fuses ............................................ 435Wipers ..................................................... 163

Winter Driving ............................................. 284

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 240XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 244

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 442

500

2007 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M · control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M · control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of...